2014 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M...GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual...

Black plate (1,1)GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-6014315) - 2014 - crc - 8/15/13

2014 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-42Universal Remote System . . . . 5-49

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-18

Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-32Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-53


2014 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, ACADIA, andDENALI are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCwherever it appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 22867654 B Second Printing ©2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Danger, Warnings, andCautions

{ Danger

Text marked{ Danger providesinformation on risk of fatal injury.Disregarding this information mayendanger life.

{ Warning

Text marked{ Warning providesinformation on risk of accident orinjury. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to injury.

{ Caution

Text marked{ Caution providesinformation that may indicate ahazard that could result in injuryor death. It could also result inpossible damage to the vehicle.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

t : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-19Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-20Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Universal Remote System . . . 1-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8-11.

2. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3 (Out of View).

Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-3.

3. Instrument Cluster on page 5-10.

4. Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 5-28 (If Equipped).

5. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4-1.

USB Port (Inside IP Storage) (IfEquipped). See AuxiliaryDevices on page 7-17.

6. Infotainment on page 7-1.

7. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

8. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-4.

9. Parking Brake on page 9-27.

10. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-16.

11. Dome Lamp Override. SeeDome Lamps on page 6-5.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-5.

12. Cruise Control on page 9-30.

13. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

14. Horn on page 5-3.

15. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2 (If Equipped).

16. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-23.

17. Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1 or Dual AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 8-4 (If Equipped).

18. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-22.

19. Power Outlets on page 5-7.

20. Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5-4.

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-32 (IfEquipped).

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) on page 9-40 (IfEquipped).

Tow/Haul Button (If Equipped).See Tow/Haul Mode onpage 9-24.

Power Liftgate Button (IfEquipped). See Liftgate onpage 2-8.

21. Heated and Cooled FrontSeats on page 3-8 (IfEquipped).

22. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-3.

23. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-30.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

To open or close the liftgate, pressand hold8 until the liftgatebegins to move.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2.

Remote Vehicle Start

Starting the Vehicle

With this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.


In Brief 1-5

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-4.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door manually:. From the inside use the door

lock knob on the window sill.. From the outside turn the key

toward the front or rear of thevehicle, or press the K or Qbutton on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Power Door Locks

Base Model

Uplevel Model


1-6 In Brief

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks on page 2-6.

LiftgateTo open the liftgate the vehicle mustbe in P (Park). Press the touch padunder the liftgate handle. To closethe liftgate, use the pull cup or pullstrap as an aid.

Power Liftgate

If equipped with a power liftgate, thevehicle must be in P (Park) tooperate it.

. Press and hold8 on theRemote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

. Press O.

. Press the touch pad on theoutside liftgate handle.

See Liftgate on page 2-8.

Windows

Uplevel Shown, Base Similar

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see PowerWindows on page 2-18.


In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

1. Seat Adjustment Handle

2. Driver Seat Height AdjustmentLever

3. Seatback Lever

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle (1) under the seatto unlock it.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition, and then release thehandle (1).

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Move the lever (2) up or down toraise or lower the seat.

Use the lever (3) to adjust theseatback.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3and Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-5.

Power Seats

1. Seat Adjustment Control

2. Seatback Control

3. Lumbar Control

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding thecontrol (1) forward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control (1) upor down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control (1)up or down.

. Adjust the seatback by tilting thetop of the control (2) forward orrearward.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-5.

. Increase or decrease lumbarsupport by pressing the front orrear of the control (3).

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-4.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-4.


1-8 In Brief

Memory Features

If available, the controls on thedriver door are used to program andrecall memory settings for the driverseat, outside mirrors, and powersteering column (if equipped).

See Memory Seats on page 3-6 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5-42.

Second Row Seats

The second row seat can be foldedto access the third row. Pull thesliding seat lever forward; the seatcushion folds, and the seat slidesforward.

See Rear Seats on page 3-9.

Third Row SeatsThe third row seatbacks can befolded forward, and the seats canbe removed.

To fold the third row seatback:

1. Remove anything on or underthe seat.

2. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch using a key in the sloton the mini-buckle, and let thebelt retract into the headliner.Stow the mini-latch in the holderin the headliner.


In Brief 1-9

3. Pull up on the release lever onthe back of the seat.

4. Push the seatback forward tolay flat.

See Third Row Seats on page 3-11.

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

Heated and Cooled Seat ButtonsShown, Heated Seat Buttons

Similar

If equipped, the buttons are on thecenter console. To operate, theengine must be running.

I : If equipped, press to heat theseatback only.

H : If equipped, press to cool theentire seat.

J : Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

See Heated and Cooled Front Seatson page 3-8.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.


1-10 In Brief

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3-14.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-15.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-16.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-44.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-30

The passenger airbag statusindicator will light on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-15.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Base Model

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press o or p to select a mirror.

2. Press the control pad to adjustthe mirror.


In Brief 1-11

3. Return the switch to the centerto deselect the mirror.

Uplevel Model


1. Press (1) or (2) to select amirror.


3. Press (1) or (2) again to deselectthe mirror.

Folding Mirrors

For vehicles with manual foldingmirrors, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Pull the mirror out to returnto its original position.

For vehicles with power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (1) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (2) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

See Folding Mirrors on page 2-15.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror to clearlyview the area behind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind. SeeManual Rearview Mirror onpage 2-18.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

The mirror will automatically reducethe glare from the headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson when the vehicle is started. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirroron page 2-18.


1-12 In Brief

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps are in theoverhead console and above therear seat passengers.

The dome lamps come on when adoor is opened, unless the domelamp override button is pressed in.

To manually turn them on, turn theinstrument panel brightness controlclockwise to the farthest position.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button isnext to the exterior lamps control.

E DOME OFF: Press the buttonand the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. An indicatorlight on the button comes on toshow that the dome lamps are off.Press the button again so the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

AMBIENT OFF (If Equipped):Press the button to turn the ambientlights off. Press the button again toturn ambient lights on.


In Brief 1-13

Reading Lamps

Press the button near each lamp toturn them on or off.

For more information, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6-5.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6-5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel, to the left of thesteering wheel.

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic light control off oron again.

AUTO: Turns the headlamps onautomatically at normal brightness,together with the other exteriorlamps and instrument panel lights.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights. A warningchime sounds if the driver door isopened when the ignition switch isoff and the headlamps are on.

# : If equipped, it turns the foglamps on or off.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1. Fog Lamps on page 6-4

Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn theband up for more frequent wipes ordown for less frequent wipes.

LO: Slow wipes.

HI: Fast wipes.

Windshield Washer

J FRONT : Press the button atthe end of the lever to spray washerfluid on the windshield.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper and rear wash buttonis on the center stack below theclimate control system.


1-14 In Brief

Z : Press to turn the rear wiper onand off. The wiper speed cannot bechanged.

Y : Press to spray washer fluid onthe rear window. The window wiperwill also come on.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5-4.

Climate Controls

1. Fan Control

2. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

3. Temperature Control

4. Recirculation

5. Air Delivery Mode Control

6. Air Conditioning

7. Rear Window Defogger


In Brief 1-15

Dual Automatic Climate Control System

1. Driver and Passenger SideTemperature Controls

2. Air Delivery Mode Controls

3. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

4. AUTO (Automatic Operation)


6. Defrost


8. Fan Control

9. Recirculation

10. Air Conditioning

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1 or Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8-4 (IfEquipped). For more informationabout the rear climate control, seeRear Climate Control System onpage 8-9 or Rear Climate ControlSystem (with Rear Seat Audio) onpage 8-10.

Transmission

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument cluster. When using theERS mode a number will displaynext to the L, indicating the currentgear that has been selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus button onthe shift lever, to increase ordecrease the gear rangeavailable.

See Manual Mode on page 9-24.


1-16 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

PUSH/O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to adjust thevolume.

Z : Press to eject a disc from theCD player. See CD Player onpage 7-12.

AUX Port: 3.5 mm (1/8 in)connection for external audiodevices.

PUSH/SEL: Turn to manually find astation or highlight a menuselection. Press to select ahighlighted selection.

D : Press to go to the Home Page.See “Home Page” in Operation onpage 7-3.

SRCE: Press to change the audiosource to AM, FM, SiriusXM® (ifequipped), CD, USB, iPod®,or AUX.

FAV: Press to display the favoritelist or add a favorite. See Operationon page 7-3.

© SEEK or SEEK¨ : Seek or scanstations and tracks. See Operationon page 7-3.

/ BACK: Press to return to theprevious screen in a menu.


In Brief 1-17

Storing Radio Station Presets

Up to 30 preset stations can bestored. AM, FM, and SiriusXM (ifequipped) can be mixed.

1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXMmain page, press and hold any 1−5 buttons or one of the presetscreen buttons at the bottom ofthe screen. After a few seconds,a beep is heard and the newpreset information displays onthat screen button.

2. Repeat for each preset.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7-6.

Setting the Clock

Press Settings on the Home Page,then press the Set Time or Set Datesettings screen button to display thedifferent options for setting the timeand date.

Set Time:. Press the up or down arrows to

increase or decrease the Hours,Minutes, AM, PM, or 24 hr onthe clock.

. Press and hold to quicklyincrease or decrease the timesettings.

. Press OK or the Back screenbutton to save the adjustmentsthat were made.

Set Date:. Press the up or down arrows to

increase or decrease the Month,Day, and Year settings.

. Press and hold to quicklyincrease or decrease the datesettings.

. Press OK or the Back screenbutton to save the adjustmentsthat were made.

Satellite RadioIf equipped, vehicles with aSiriusXM® satellite radio tuner and avalid SiriusXM satellite radiosubscription can receive SiriusXMprogramming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

Refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7-9.

Portable Audio DevicesThe vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary input jack on the faceplateand a USB port in the instrumentpanel storage area. Externaldevices such as iPods, laptopcomputers, MP3 players, CDchangers, USB storage devices,


1-18 In Brief

etc. can be connected to theauxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)input jack or the USB portdepending on the audio system.

If equipped, there are two USBports on the rear of the centerconsole that can be used forcharging only. They can chargedevices that draw 2.1 amps or less.See the device’s owner manual forthe specification.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-17.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone to make and receivehands-free calls using the vehicleaudio system and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone must be paired with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system before itcan be used in the vehicle. Not allphones will support all functions.

See Bluetooth on page 7-20.

Steering Wheel Controls

w orc /x : Press to changefavorite radio stations, select trackson a CD, or navigate tracks orfolders on an iPod or USB device.

b /g : Press and hold to silencethe vehicle speakers only. Pressagain to turn the sound on. Press tointeract with OnStar® (if equipped)or Bluetooth systems.

c /x : Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio, CD, and for equippedvehicles, front auxiliary, rearauxiliary, and iPod/USB.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, track, or chapter whilesourced to the CD slot, or to selecttracks and folders on an iPod orUSB device.

+ e or − e : Press to increase or todecrease the volume.

See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.


In Brief 1-19

Cruise Control

T : Press to turn cruise control onand off. The indicator light on thebutton comes on when cruisecontrol is on.

+RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed, or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET–: Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9-30.

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.There is also information on settingsand downloadable applications (ifequipped).

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator when a vehicle isdetected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow a

vehicle much too closely. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-32.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW is intended to helpavoid unintentional lane departuresat speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. TheLDW indicator, @, appears green ifa lane marking is detected. If thevehicle departs the lane, theindicator will change to amber andflash. In addition, beeps will sound.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-40.


1-20 In Brief

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, SBZA will detectvehicles in the next lane over in thevehicle's side blind zone area.When this happens, the SBZAdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirrorand will flash if the turn signal is on.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9-35.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle, on thecenter stack display, when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-37.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf equipped, this system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph). Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) uses audiblebeeps to provide distance andsystem information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-34.

Power OutletsThe vehicle has 12-volt accessorypower outlets, which can be used toplug in electrical equipment, such asa cell phone or MP3 player.

The power outlets are located:. On the center stack below the

climate controls.. Inside the center floor console.

. At the rear of the center floorconsole.

. In the rear cargo area.

To use the outlets, remove thecover.

See Power Outlets on page 5-7.

Universal Remote System

The Universal Home RemoteSystem allows for garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices to beprogrammed to work with thesebuttons in the vehicle.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5-49.


In Brief 1-21

SunroofThe ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must beactive to operate the sunroof andpower sunshade. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-18.

The vehicle may have a sunroofover the front seats and a rearsunroof over the second row seats.The rear sunroof does not open.

Vent: Press the front or rear of theswitch to vent or close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:Press and release the rear or frontof the switch to express-open orexpress-close the sunroof.

Manual Sunshade

The sunshades must be openedand closed manually. To open thesunshade, press the button on thesunshade handle to release it andguide it back. To close thesunshade, pull the sunshadeforward until it latches.

See Sunroof on page 2-20.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin, andthe StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems turn on automatically everytime the vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control and

StabiliTrak, press and release 4on the center stack, and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5-38.

. Press and release 4 again toturn on both systems.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28.


1-22 In Brief

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that the

tire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-46.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton until “100%” is displayed.Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.


In Brief 1-23

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New GMC owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside AssistanceProgram.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14-1.


1-24 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-16Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-17Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-18Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If locked out of the vehicle, callRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.

If equipped, with an active OnStarsubscription, an OnStar Advisormay remotely unlock the vehicle.See “OnStar,” if equipped.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

With Remote Start and PowerLiftgate Shown, Without Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, seeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2-4.



Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn soundswhen Q is pressed again withinfive seconds. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-42.

Pressing Q may arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-11.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within five seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled through the DIC, theparking lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-42.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Vehicle Alarm Systemon page 2-11.

8 (Power Liftgate): Press andhold until the liftgate begins to moveto open or close the liftgate. Thetaillamps flash and a chime soundsto indicate when the liftgate isopening or closing.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The parkinglamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The parking lamps flash andthe horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved to ON/RUN orL is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersprogrammed to it. See your dealerto program transmitters to thisvehicle.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTEKEYmessage displays in the DIC.



{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.. Carefully insert the tool into

the notch located along theparting line of the

transmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that starts theengine from outside of the vehicle.

/ (Remote Start): This button ison the RKE transmitter if the vehiclehas remote start.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in view

when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle could run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitter rangemay be less while the vehicle isrunning.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

Starting the Engine UsingRemote Start

To start the vehicle:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash. If the



vehicle's lights cannot be seen,press and hold/ for at leastfour seconds.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system will operateautomatically if the vehicle has theautomatic system, or at the samesetting as when the vehicle was lastturned off.

If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system and heatedseats, the heated seats turn onduring colder outside temperaturesand shut off when the key is turnedto ON/RUN. See Heated andCooled Front Seats on page 3-8.

The rear window defogger andheated mirrors, if the vehicle hasthem, turn on during colder outsidetemperatures and turn off when thekey is turned to ON/RUN.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto the ON/RUN position to drive thevehicle.

If the vehicle is left running itautomatically shuts off after10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

Extending Engine Run Time

To extend the engine run time by10 minutes, repeat Steps 1–3 whilethe engine is still running. Theengine run time can only beextended if it is the first remote startsince the vehicle has been driven.Remote start can be extendedone time.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10-minute timeframe has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10-minute timeframe will start.

For example, if Q and then/ arepressed again after the vehicle hasbeen running for five minutes,

10 minutes are added, allowing theengine to run for a total of15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

After the vehicle's engine has beenstarted two times using the remotestart button, the ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To manually shut off a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.



Conditions in Which theRemote Start Will Not Work

The vehicle cannot be started usingthe remote start feature if the key isin the ignition, the hood is open, or ifthere is an emission control systemmalfunction.

The engine turns off during a remotestart if the coolant temperature getstoo high or if the oil pressuregets low.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door, use thekey from the outside or the doorlock from the inside.

Power Door Locks

Base Model

Uplevel Model



K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or the lock button on the RKEtransmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature andimmediately lock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmed byusing the Driver Information Center(DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-42.

Automatic Door LocksVehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable you toprogram the vehicle's power doorlocks. This feature can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-42 for more information.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a frontdoor is open.

If the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driverdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when thefront passenger door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.

Safety Locks

{ Caution

Pulling the inside door handlewhile the rear door safety locksare engaged could damage yourvehicle. Do not pull the insidedoor handle while the rear doorsafety locks are engaged.

The vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.



Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.

Doors

Liftgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust onpage 9-21.

{ Caution

To avoid damage to the liftgate orliftgate glass, make sure the areaabove and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.



Manual Liftgate

To unlock the liftgate, press thepower door lock switch or press Kon the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter twice. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad under the liftgate handle and liftup. The vehicle must be in P (Park)and the battery must be charged.Use the pull cup or pull strap tolower and close the liftgate.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.

Power Liftgate

If equipped with a power liftgate, thevehicle must be in P (Park) tooperate. The taillamps flash and achime sounds when the powerliftgate moves.

{ Warning

You, or others, could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

The power liftgate can be poweropened and closed in thefollowing ways:

. Press and hold8 on theRKE transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-2.

. Press O.

. Press the touch pad on theoutside liftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons or touch pad asecond time while the liftgate ismoving reverses the direction.



Power Liftgate Touch Pad

The liftgate can also be closed bypressingl next to the liftgate

latch. Pressl a second timeduring the liftgate operation toreverse the operation.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan be operated manually.

If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) while the liftgate powerfunction is in progress, it will

continue to completion. If thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park) andaccelerated before the power liftgatelatch closes, the liftgate mayreverse to the open position. Cargocould fall out of the vehicle. Alwaysmake sure the power liftgate isclosed and latched beforedriving away.

If the power liftgate is used and theliftgate support struts have lostpressure, the taillamps will flash anda chime will sound. The liftgate willstay open temporarily, and thenslowly close. See a dealer forservice before using the liftgate ifthis occurs.

Obstacle Detection Features

If an obstacle is encountered duringthe power open or close cycle, awarning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or openposition. After removing the obstaclethe liftgate will resume normaloperation.

If more obstacles are encounteredon the same power cycle, the powerfunction deactivates. The liftgatemust be opened or closed manuallyif this occurs. A message displayson the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) to indicate that theliftgate is open. See Door AjarMessages on page 5-33. Afterremoving the obstacles, manuallyopen the liftgate fully or close andlatch the liftgate. The liftgate willresume normal power operation.

The vehicle also has pinch sensorsalong the side edges of the liftgate.If the sensors press against anobject while closing, the liftgate willreverse direction and open fully. Theliftgate will remain open until it isactivated again or closed manually.

Do not force the liftgate open orclosed during a power cycle.



Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, press OFF on the powerliftgate switch. A message displayson the DIC indicating manualoperation mode. See Door AjarMessages on page 5-33.

With the liftgate in manual modeand all of the doors unlocked, theliftgate can be manually opened andclosed.

Press the touch pad on the outsideof the liftgate pull cup and lift toopen. Use the pull cup to lower andclose the liftgate. The liftgate latchwill power close.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.

If8 on the RKE transmitter orl on the liftgate is pressed whilein manual operation mode, thetaillamps will flash three times, butthe liftgate will not move.

It is not recommended to drive withthe liftgate open. However, if thevehicle must be driven with theliftgate open, the liftgate should beset to manual operation.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemOn vehicles with an anti-theft alarmsystem, to activate the system:

. Press Q on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or thepower door lock switch whenany door is open.



The security light flashes.

When the door is closed, thesecurity light stops flashing andstays on solid for approximately30 seconds. The contenttheft-deterrent alarm is notarmed until the security lightgoes off.

If the delayed locking feature isactive, the alarm is not activateduntil all doors are closed and thesecurity light goes off.

. Press Q when the driver door isclosed. The security light comeson solid for approximately30 seconds and then goes off.The content theft-deterrent alarmis not armed until the securitylight goes off.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe vehicle's key or the manualdoor lock.

If a locked door is opened withoutusing the RKE transmitter, a10-second pre-alarm occurs. The

horn chirps and the lights flash.If the key is not placed in theignition and turned to START or thedoor is not unlocked by pressing Qduring the 10-second pre-alarm, thealarm goes off. The headlamps flashand the horn sounds for about30 seconds, then turns off to savethe battery power.

The vehicle can be started with thecorrect ignition key if the alarm hasbeen set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the door

key after the doors are closed.. Unlock the door with the RKE

transmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way sets off the alarm ifthe system has been armed.

Press K or place the key in theignition and turn it to START to turnoff the alarm.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver side window, and openthe driver door.

2. Press Q.3. Get out of the vehicle, close the

door, and wait for the securitylight to go out.

4. Reach in through the window,unlock the door with the manualdoor lock, and open the door.This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould, but the headlamps flash,check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replacethe fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10-28.

If the alarm does not sound or theheadlamps do not flash, see yourdealer for service.



ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on if thereis a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses an incorrect key, the vehicledoes not start. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentpanel comes on when trying to startthe vehicle, there may be a problemwith the theft-deterrent system. Turnthe ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key and checkthe fuses. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10-28 foradditional information. If the enginestill does not start with the other key,the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key maybe faulty. See your dealer who canservice the PASS-Key III+ to have anew key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedto the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all currentlyprogrammed keys are lost or do notoperate, you must see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have keys madeand programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank that is cut exactly asthe ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer for service.



3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUNposition within five seconds ofthe original key being turned tothe LOCK/OFF position.

The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost ordamaged, see your dealer or alocksmith to have a new key made.

The SERVICE THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when there is aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Security Messages onpage 5-39 for additional information.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

Base Model


1. Press o or p to select a mirror.


3. Return the switch to the centerto deselect the mirror.



Uplevel Model


1. Press (1) or (2) to select amirror.


3. Press (1) or (2) again to deselectthe mirror.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)

If the vehicle has the SBZA system,see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9-35.

Folding MirrorsFor vehicles with manual foldingmirrors, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Pull the mirror out to returnto its original position.

For vehicles with power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (1) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (2) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors vibrate at normal

driving speeds.

To reset the mirrors, fold and unfoldthe mirrors one time using thepower folding mirror controls.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting. This sound isnormal during the reset operation.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-4.



Automatic DimmingMirrorIf equipped, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofthe headlamps from behind. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirroron page 2-18.

Blind Spot MirrorsIf equipped, the blind spot mirror isa small convex mirror built into theupper and outer corner of bothoutside mirrors. It can show objectsthat may be in the vehicle'sblind zone.

Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicle isa long distance away, the imagein the main mirror is small andnear the inboard edge of themirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitions fromthe main mirror to the blind spotmirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appears inthe blind spot mirror.



Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double check beforemoving slowly into theadjacent lane.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the outside mirrors have apark tilt feature. This feature tilts theoutside mirrors to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This allows the driverto view the curb for parallel parking.

The passenger and/or driver mirrorreturns to its original position whenthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or offthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-42 formore information.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, the vehiclemay have three control buttons atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See “Onstar,” if equipped.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Manual Rearview MirrorIf equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of the headlampsfrom behind. This feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2-1.



Uplevel Shown, Base Similar

The driver door has switches thatcontrol the passenger and rearwindows. The power windows workwith the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN or withRetained Accessory Power (RAP)active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-18.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edge ofthe switch to raise the window.

Express-Up/Express-DownWindows

A window with the express-up/downfeature allows it to be raised orlowered without holding the switch.Press or pull the window switch fullyand release it to activate theexpress feature. The express modecan be canceled by pressing orpulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the vehicle battery has beenrecharged, disconnected,or replaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to bereprogrammed for this feature towork. To program the window:

1. Close all doors with the ignitionin the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position, or with RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-18.

2. Press and continue to hold thewindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the windowswitch to close the window.Continue to hold it briefly afterthe window is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that hasthe express-up feature.

Anti-Pinch Feature

The anti-pinch feature is onwindows with the express-upfeature. If an object is in the way ofthe window as it is express-closing,or in certain weather conditions likesevere icing, the window will stopand open to a factory presetposition. The window functionsnormally once the obstruction isremoved.



Rear Window Lockout

The rear window lockout featureprevents the rear passengerwindows from operating, exceptfrom the driver position.

Pressv to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. Theindicator light comes on whenactivated.

Pressv again to deactivate thelockout switch.

Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down or unhook itand move it to the side to reduceglare.

Visor Vanity Mirror

Lift the cover to use the mirror andturn the lamps on.

Roof

SunroofThe ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must beactive to operate the sunroof andpower sunshade. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-18.

If equipped, there may be a rearsunroof over the second row seats.The rear sunroof does not open.



Vent: Press and hold the front ofthe switch to vent the sunroof. Pressand hold the rear of the switch toclose the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:Press and release the rear of theswitch to express-open the sunroof.Press and release the front of theswitch to express-close the sunroof.

Manual Sunshade

The sunshades must be openedand closed manually. To open thesunshade, press the button on thesunshade handle to release it andguide it back. To close thesunshade, pull the sunshadeforward until it latches.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this isnormal.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-21Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-21Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-25When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-34

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-35Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-42Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-53


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

To raise or lower the head restraint,press the button located on the sideof the head restraint, and pull up orpush the head restraint down, andrelease the button. Pull and push onthe head restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

To adjust the head restraint forward,grasp the head restraint and pullforward until the desired lockingposition is reached.

To adjust the head restraintrearward, press the button locatedon the side of the head restraint,



and push the head restraintrearward until the desired lockingposition is reached. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's second-row seatshave head restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The vehicle's third-row seats haveheadrests in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

The second-row head restraints andthird-row headrests are notdesigned to be removed.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.


2. Driver Seat Height AdjustmentLever

3. Seatback Lever

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle (1) under the seatto unlock it.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition, and then release thehandle (1).

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Move the lever (2) up or down toraise or lower the seat.

Use the lever (3) to adjust theseatback. See Reclining Seatbackson page 3-5.



Power Seat Adjustment

1. Seat Adjustment Control

2. Seatback Control

3. Lumbar Control

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding thecontrol (1) forward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control (1) upor down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control (1)up or down.

. Adjust the seatback by tilting thetop of the control (2) forward orrearward.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-5.

. Increase or decrease lumbarsupport by pressing the front orrear of the control (3).

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

If equipped, move the handleforward or rearward to increase ordecrease lumbar support.



Power Lumbar

If equipped, press and hold the frontor rear of control to increase ordecrease lumbar support. Releasethe control when the seatbackreaches the desired level of lumbarsupport.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.



To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

Memory Seats

If available, the controls on thedriver door are used to program andrecall memory settings for the driverseat, outside mirrors, and powersteering column (if equipped).



Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat andseatback recliner, both outsidemirrors, and the power steeringcolumn (if equipped).

Not all vehicles will have theability to save and recall themirror positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1” or“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).A single beep will sound. The seat,outside mirrors, and power steeringcolumn (if equipped) will move tothe positions previously stored forthe identified driver.

Memory Remote Recall

The memory feature can recall thedriver seat, outside mirrors, andpower steering column (if equipped)to stored positions when enteringthe vehicle.

To activate, unlock the driver doorwith the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. The driverseat, outside mirrors, and powersteering column (if equipped) willmove to the memory positionsassociated with the transmitter usedto unlock the vehicle.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-42.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the power seat controls, memorybuttons, power mirror buttons, or thepower steering column control (ifequipped).

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or steering column whilerecalling a memory position, the

recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold theappropriate manual control for thememory item that is not recalling fortwo seconds. Try recalling thememory position again by pressingthe appropriate memory button.If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

The easy exit feature can move thedriver seat rearward and the powersteering column (if equipped) upand forward to allow extra room toexit the vehicle.

S (Easy Exit Positions): Press toactivate the recall. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park).

If this feature is programmed on inthe vehicle personalization menu,automatic driver seat and powersteering column movement occurwhen the ignition key is removed.



A single beep sounds. The driverseat moves back approximately8 cm (3 in) and the power steeringcolumn (if equipped) moves up andforward. To move the seat backfarther, press S again until the seatis all the way back.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-42.

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Heated and Cooled Seat ButtonsShown, Heated Seat Buttons

Similar

If equipped, the buttons are on thecenter console. To operate, theengine must be running.

I (Heated Seatback): If equipped,press to heat the seatback only.

H (Cooled Seat): If equipped,press to cool the entire seat.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then to



the off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

The passenger heated seat maytake longer to heat up.

The heated and/or cooled seats arecanceled after the ignition isturned off.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats may turn on automaticallyduring a remote vehicle start. Theheated seats will be canceled whenthe ignition is turned on. Press thedesired heated seat button to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated seat button lights willnot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature of an unoccupiedseat may be reduced.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-4.

Rear Seats


2. Reclining Seatback Strap

3. Sliding Seat Lever

Entering and Exiting theThird Row

{ Warning

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

{ Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.



To access the third row:

1. Remove objects on the floor infront of or on the second rowseat, or in the seat tracks on thefloor.

2. Move the front center consolearmrest completely forward. SeeCenter Console Storage onpage 4-2.

3. Place the folding armrests in theupright position.

4. Make sure that the safety belt isunfastened and in the stowedposition.

5. Pull the sliding seat lever (3)forward. The seatback will tiltforward, and the seat will beginsliding forward. Continue to pushforward on the seatback until theentire seat moves all the wayforward and the seat cushion isfolded.

Returning the Seat to theSeating Position

To return the second row seat to itsnormal seating position:

1. Remove objects on the floorbehind the second row seat or inthe seat tracks on the floor.

2. Slide the seat rearward bypushing on the seatback untilthe seat is locked into place.

3. Continue pushing the seatbackrearward until the seatback islocked into place.

4. Push down on the rear of theseat cushion until it is locked inplace.

5. Push and pull on the seatbackand seat cushion to make surethey are locked in place.

6. Check that the safety belt is notunder the seat cushion.

Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Leaning rearward in the seat,pull the reclining seatbackstrap (2).

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the strap (2) to lock theseatback in place.


Folding the Seatback

To fold the second row seatbacks:


2. Place the armrest in the uprightposition, and unfasten thesafety belt.



3. Pull forward on the recliningseatback strap (2).

The head restraint will fold downautomatically.

To return the seatback to theseating position, lift the seatbackand push it rearward until it locksinto place. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it is locked.Pull up on the head restraint toreturn it to the upright, lockedposition.

Adjusting the Seats

To adjust the second row seats, pulloutward on the seat adjustmenthandle (1). Slide the seat forward orrearward to the desired position.Release the handle (1), and pushand pull on the seat to make sure itis locked.

Third Row Seats

{ Warning

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or pushed forward in theentry position, could cause injuryin a sudden stop or crash. Besure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sureit is locked into place.

Folding the Seatback

{ Caution


To fold the third row seatback:


2. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch, using a key in the sloton the mini-buckle, and let thebelt retract into the headliner.Stow the mini-latch in the holderin the headliner.



3. Pull up on the release lever onthe back of the seat. Theheadrest moves forwardautomatically.

4. Push the seatback forward tolay flat.

Returning the Seat to theSeating Position

To return the seatback to theseating position:

1. From the rear of the vehicle,raise the seatback to the uprightposition using the pull strap onthe back of the third row seat,

or lift the seatback and push itinto place from inside thevehicle.

2. The headrest must be lockedinto place before sitting inthe seat.

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

protection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

4. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle. Donot let it twist.

5. Pull on the safety belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.

Removing the Third Row Seats

To remove a third row seat:

1. Remove the cargo managementsystem, if equipped andinstalled. See CargoManagement System onpage 4-3.




{ Caution


3. Fold the seatback down. See“Folding the Seatback” earlier inthis section.

4. Remove the rear bolts on thefloor on each side of the seat.

5. Remove the seat by tilting itslightly upward, and then pullingit out of the rear of the vehicle inone motion.

6. Replace the bolts in the floorholes for storage.

Installing the Third Row Seats

To reinstall a third row seat:

1. Before installing the seat, theseatback must be foldedforward. See “Folding theSeatback” earlier in this section.

The seats must be placed in theproper locations to attachcorrectly. The wider seat mustbe installed on the driver sideand the narrower seat on thepassenger side. Remove thebolts from the holes in the floorbefore installing the seats.

2. Place the seat on the vehiclefloor so that the front seat hooksare on the vehicle bars.

3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to55Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on theseat to make sure it is locked inplace.

4. Raise the seatback to its uprightposition. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked into place.

5. Push the headrest up intoposition. Push and pull on theheadrest to make sure it islocked into place.

6. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle. Donot let it twist.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areas

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-13.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the



safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-36 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-38.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.



. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable safetybelt and the safety belt is notattached, see “Returning the Seat tothe Seating Position” under ThirdRow Seats on page 3-11 forinstruction on reconnecting thesafety belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

4. Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-21.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”

later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

6. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.



Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderbut not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to but notcontacting the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3-15.

To move it down, push down on therelease button and move the heightadjuster to the desired position. Youcan move the height adjuster up bypushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, for vehicleswith side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash on page 3-22.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear safetybelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

Outboard Positions

1. For the outboard positions,remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior body.

For the third row center position,locate the comfort guide which islocated in a storage pocket, atthe top of the seat, under theheadrest on the driver side ofthe vehicle. To access thecomfort guide, you will first needto move the headrest forward bypulling on the handle behind theseatback. The comfort guide willnow be accessible.

Third Row Center Position



Pull the comfort guide out of itsstorage location and then returnthe headrest to its uprightposition.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.



To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide into its storage location oron its storage clip.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never

use it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-13.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-22.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-14.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand for the second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbag:. A front center airbag for the

driver and front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on anattached label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For the front center airbag, the wordAIRBAG is on the inboard side ofthe driver seatback.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbags

are also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-27.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

safety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The driver

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

should sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the front centerarmrest or console in vehicleswith a front center airbag.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To read

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

how, see Older Children onpage 3-36 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3-38.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-14 formore information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

If the vehicle has a front centerairbag, it is in the inboard side of thedriver seatback.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond and third row outboardpassengers are in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat or consoleaccessories that block theinflation path of a seat-mountedside impact airbag or the frontcenter airbag, if equipped.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie-downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System onpage 3-23. Airbags are designed toinflate if the impact exceeds thespecific airbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

The front center airbag, if equipped,is designed to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes dependingupon the location of the impact,when either side of the vehicle isstruck. In addition, the front centerairbag is designed to inflate whenthe sensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on its

side. The front center airbag is notdesigned to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,or rear impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensing



system predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or the repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-25.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steering

wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare also designed to help containthe head and chest of occupants inthe outboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows. Therollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-27 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated. Thefront center airbag, if equipped, andthe roof-rail airbags may still be atleast partially inflated for some timeafter they inflate. Some componentsof the airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-25.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of



the windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off the

fuel system after the airbags inflate.You can lock the doors, and turn offthe interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers by using thecontrols for those features.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-13 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-14.



. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol foron or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-15.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seated

occupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagshould be allowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in a

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

forward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-15.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that a

person of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

with the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3-53or Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) on page 3-51.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If this

happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s size. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant



If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers. Alsoremove laptops, or otherelectronic devices.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-34 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.



. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-14 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changingany parts of the front seats, safety



belts, airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling or pillar garnish trim,overhead console, front sensors,side impact sensors, airbag wiring,or the front center console if thevehicle has a front center airbag.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system thatincludes sensors as part of the frontoutboard passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim, or; withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of the

passenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-30.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10-54 foradditional information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13-3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-14.

{ Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-25. See yourdealer for service.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-14.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-16. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-16.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.



Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat.

It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If a forward-facing childrestraint must be secured in the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

right front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go.

If a child restraint is installed inthe second row center seat, movethe second row seat to therearward position, wheneverpossible, to minimize contact withthe front center airbag,if equipped.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-44.

Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

The vehicle may be equipped with afront center airbag in the inboardside of the driver seat. Even with afront center airbag, a child restraintcan be installed in any second rowseating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriously

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off. Secure rear-facingchild restraints in a rear seat,even if the front passenger frontalairbag is off.

It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If a forward-facing childrestraint must be secured in theright front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-30 for additionalinformation.

If a child restraint is installed in asecond row center seat, move thesecond row seat to the rearwardposition, whenever possible, tominimize contact with the frontcenter airbag, if equipped.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be able



to access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the child

restraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row — Bucket

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Second Row— 60/40 Bench


H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Third Row


To assist in locating the loweranchors, each second row anchorposition has a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.



To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is near the anchor.

Second Row — Bucket Shown,Bench Similar

The top tether anchors are at thebottom rear of the seatback for eachseating position in the second row.

Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Third Row

The third row has one top tetheranchor at the bottom rear of thecenter seatback. This anchor shouldbe used for the center seatingposition only. Never install two toptethers using the same top tetheranchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requires

that the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3-42 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

anchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

{ Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

The vehicle may be equipped with afront center airbag in the inboardside of the driver seat. Even with afront center airbag, a child restraintcan be installed in any second rowseating position. If a child restraint isinstalled in a second row centerseat, move the second row seat tothe rearward position, wheneverpossible, to minimize contact withthe front center airbag.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-42.



This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead, use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. To access the loweranchors in the second row,it may help to recline theseatback.

Third row seatbacks mustbe upright before placingthe child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.4. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

If necessary, adjust theangle of the second rowseatback to achieve a tightinstallation. Make sure thesecond row benchseatbacks are aligned atthe same angle.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if the vehicle has one.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:



If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)The vehicle may be equipped with afront center airbag in the inboardside of the driver seat. Even with afront center airbag, a child restraintcan be installed in any second rowseating position. If you install a childrestraint in a second row centerseat, move the second row seat tothe rearward position, wheneverpossible, to minimize contact withthe front center airbag.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-44 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-44 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3-42.



1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the shoulder belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-44 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)The vehicle has airbags. A rear seatis a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-42.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-30 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-15 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-30 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-44 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-44 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-15.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.





5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-30 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Instrument Panel Storage

This vehicle has an instrumentpanel storage area. To open thecover, pull the latch forward.

There is an auxiliary input jack onthe faceplate and a USB port in theinstrument panel storage. SeeAuxiliary Devices on page 7-17.

Glove BoxLift the glove box handle to open it.Use the key to lock and unlock theglove box.

CupholdersThere are two cupholders, withremovable liners, in front of thecenter console. There may becupholders in the second row seatarmrest. To access, pull the armrestdown. There are additionalcupholders on each side of the thirdrow seat and in each door.


4-2 Storage

Armrest Storage

If equipped, the rear seat armrestmay have two cupholders. Pull thearmrest down to access thecupholders.

Center Console Storage

Pull up the lever on the front of thecenter console armrest to slide itforward and backward. To open thearmrest storage area, press thebutton on the front of the armrest.

There is additional storage underthe armrest. Move the armrest allthe way to the rear position, thenslide the storage cover back toaccess.

There is a removable tray in thestorage area. Pull up on the tray toremove and access the lowerstorage area and power outlet. SeePower Outlets on page 5-7.

If equipped, there may be twocharging USB ports on the rear ofthe console. See Auxiliary Deviceson page 7-17.


Storage 4-3

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, itcan be used to cover items in therear of the vehicle. To install thecover, place the loops on eachcorner of the cover on the fourhooks in the rear of the vehicle. Thecover should be stored securelywhen not in use.

Cargo Tie-DownsFour cargo tie‐downs are located inthe rear compartment of the vehicle.The tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads.

Cargo ManagementSystemThis vehicle has a cargomanagement system located inthe rear.

To remove the cargo managementcover:

1. Open the cover. It remains openwhen lifted.

2. Pull the cover up making sure tounhook the hinges at the rear ofthe cover.

3. Store the cover outside thevehicle or reattach beforedriving.

{ Warning

An improperly latched and closedcargo cover, or cargo cover left inthe open position, could bethrown about the vehicle during acrash or sudden maneuver.Someone could be injured. Besure to return the cover to theclosed position and latch beforedriving. If the cover is removed,always store it outside of thevehicle. When it is replaced,always be sure that it is securelyreattached.


4-4 Storage

Convenience Net

Power Liftgate Shown, ManualLiftgate Similar

1. Cargo Cover

2. Cargo Cover Hooks

3. Cargo Tie-Downs

4. Convenience Net

For vehicles with a conveniencenet (4), attach it to the vehicle usingonly the cargo tie-downs (3) oneach side. The net is used to storesmall loads and should not be usedheavy loads.

The cargo cover hooks (2) are usedto attach the cargo cover (1) to thevehicle only. Do not use the hooksto secure loads or other items to thevehicle or the hooks could bedamaged.

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items. Forroof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GM Certifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer foradditional information.


Storage 4-5

{ Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rackthat weighs more than 91 kg(200 lb) or hangs over the rear orsides of the vehicle may damagethe vehicle. Load cargo so that itrests evenly between thecrossrails and fasten cargosecurely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle.

See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.


4-6 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-13

Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-14Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-15MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-20Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-20StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-20Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-21Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-28

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-33Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-33Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-33Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-35Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-35Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-38Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-39Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-40Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-41Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-41


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-42

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-49Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

w orc /x (Next/Previous):Press to select preset or favoriteradio stations, select tracks on aCD, or select tracks and navigatefolders on an iPod® or USB device.



To select tracks on an iPod or USBdevice:

. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song listed inthe main audio page, to quicklymove forward or in reversethrough the tracks.

. Track information is displayed onthe screen. Releasew orc/x when the desired track isreached.

b /g (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressand hold to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth throughthe OnStar® system; press tointeract, then say “OnStar.” SeeBluetooth on page 7-20 and“OnStar,” if equipped.

c /x (End): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

SRCE (Source): Press to switchbetween the radio, CD, and ifequipped, front auxiliary, rearauxiliary, and iPod/USB.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the nextradio station while in AM, FM,or SiriusXM®.

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to theCD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

+ e or − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Use for a single wipingcycle.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Delays wiping cycle. Turn the bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

LO: Slow wipes.

HI: Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10-24.



Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.

Windshield Washer

J FRONT (Washer Fluid): Pressthe button at the end of the lever, tospray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers clear thewindshield and either stop or returnto the preset speed. The ignition keymust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN for this to work. SeeWasher Fluid on page 10-19.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDis displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) when thewasher fluid is low. See WasherFluid Messages on page 5-41.

Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear wash buttonis on the center stack below theclimate control system.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn therear wiper on and off. The wiperspeed cannot be changed.

Y (Wash): Press to spray washerfluid on the rear window. Thewindow wiper will also come on.Release the button when enoughfluid has been sprayed on thewindow. The rear wiper will run afew more cycles after it is released.If the rear wiper function wasalready on prior to pressing thewash button, it stays on until thewiper button is pressed again.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid that is in the windshieldwasher reservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10-19.

CompassYour vehicle may have a compassin the Driver Information Center(DIC). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-23 for moreinformation about the DIC.

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealer willset the correct zone for yourlocation.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.



Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel button untilthe vehicle heading, forexample, N for North, isdisplayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.



If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zone isset to the variance zone in whichthe vehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE for afew seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return to theprevious menu.

Clock



Press Settings on the Home Page,then press the Set Time or Set Datesettings screen button to display thedifferent options for setting the timeand date.




. Press OK or the Back screenbutton to save the adjustments.





Power OutletsThe vehicle has 12-volt outlets thatcan be used to plug in electricalequipment, such as a cell phone orMP3 player.

The power outlets are located:. On the center stack below the

climate controls.. Inside the center floor console.. The rear of the center console.. In the rear cargo area.

Lift the cover to access the outletand replace when not in use.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum20 amp rating.

Certain accessory plugs may not becompatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9-53.



{ Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 120 VoltAlternating Current

If equipped with this power outlet itcan be used to plug in electricalequipment that uses a maximumlimit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is on the rear ofthe center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is in LOCK/OFF orif the equipment is not fully seatedinto the outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset the

circuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-18. The power restarts whenequipment using 150 watts or less isplugged into the outlet and a systemfault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high initial peak

wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supplysuch as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.

See High Voltage Devices andWiring on page 10-27.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver door to show the old mileagereading.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel is leftin the tank.

An arrow in the fuel gauge indicatesthe side of the vehicle the fuel dooris on.

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, butthe vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.

When the fuel tank is low on fuel,the FUEL LEVEL LOW message willappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). For more informationsee Fuel System Messages onpage 5-35.



Here are some situations that mayoccur with the fuel gauge. None ofthese indicate a problem with thefuel gauge.. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature. Under normaldriving conditions the gauge willread approximately 100°C (210°F)or less. If the gauge pointer is near125°C (260°F), the engine istoo hot.

It means that the engine coolant hasoverheated. If the vehicle has beenoperating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.



See Engine Overheating onpage 10-16 for more information.

Voltmeter Gauge

When the engine is not running, butthe ignition is turned on, this gaugeshows the battery's state of chargein DC volts.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The vehicle'scharging system regulates voltagebased on the state of charge of thebattery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.

This is normal. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftidling for an extended period.

If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, a SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEMmessage will appear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and/or thecharging system light comes on.See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5-32 for moreinformation.

However, readings in either warningzone may indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.



Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-30.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3-23.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5-38.



Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-30 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several seconds

as a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, as



a check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays the SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM message.

See Vehicle Messages onpage 5-32 for more information.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissions

are at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-14.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the OBDII system has detected a problemand diagnosis and service might berequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system also

assists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system of the vehicle orthe replacement of the originaltires with other than those of thesame Tire Performance Criteria

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

(TPC) can affect the vehicle'semission controls and can causethis light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard accelerations.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-43. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or

improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9-42.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment and



diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD II

system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English



This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition key is turned toON/RUN. If it does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be readyto warn if there is a problem.

This light may also come on due tolow brake fluid. See Brake Fluid onpage 10-21.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will also comeon when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parkingbrake does not release fully. If itstays on after the parking brake isfully released, it means there is abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased. The pedal may be harderto push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-72.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

The brake message remains on untilany DIC button is pressed. Thebrake light remains on until theproblem is fixed. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5-33.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The ABS warning light comes onbriefly when the ignition key isturned to ON/RUN. This is normal.If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready towarn you if there is a problem.

If the light stays on, turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is noton, there are still brakes, but noantilock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on,



there are no antilock brakes andthere is a problem with the regularbrakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-18.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comes on when the Tow/Haul mode has been activated.

For more information, see Tow/HaulMode on page 9-24.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the light then turns off.

This light comes on green when thesystem is on and ready to operate.When the system determines thatthe vehicle is leaving its lanewithout using the turn signal, thislight will change to amber and flash.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-40.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If available, this light displays greenwhen a vehicle is detected ahead.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-32.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

The StabiliTrak light comes onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

This light flashes while theStabiliTrak system or the TractionControl System (TCS) is working.The light comes on when there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28.



Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on briefly whenthe vehicle is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, the vehicle may havea problem with the cooling system.Stop and turn off the vehicle toavoid damage to the engine.A warning chime sounds when thislight is on.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10-16 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5-39. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-44.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-47.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, but ifthe oil level is within the operatingrange and the oil pressure is stilllow, have the vehicle serviced.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.



This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem.

This light is also used to indicate thestatus of the anti-theft alarm systemwhen the ignition is turned off. Thelight will flash rapidly if the alarmsystem is arming and one or moreof the monitored entry points is notclosed. The light will stay on if thealarm is arming and all entry pointsare closed.

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Vehicle Alarm System onpage 2-11.

High-Beam On Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.



The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6-4 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on when the cruisecontrol is set.

This light goes out when the cruisecontrol is canceled. See CruiseControl on page 9-30.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays information aboutyour vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located at the top of theinstrument cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC also displays a shift leverposition indicator on the bottom lineof the display. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-22 for moreinformation.

The outside air temperature andcompass, if equipped, also displayon the DIC when viewing the tripand fuel information. The outside air

temperature automatically appearsin the top right corner of the DICdisplay. If there is a problem withthe system that controls thetemperature display, the numberswill be replaced with dashes. If thisoccurs, have the vehicle serviced.The compass will be shown in thebottom right corner of the DICdisplay. See Compass on page 5-4for more information.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-42 formore information.

DIC Buttons



The buttons are the set/reset,customization, vehicle information,and trip/fuel buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-42 for more information.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,park assist on vehicles with thisfeature, units, tire pressure readingson vehicles with this feature, andcompass calibration and zonesetting on vehicles with this feature.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, timer, fuel used, andaverage speed.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

OIL LIFE

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaining usefullife. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life systemwill alert you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-35. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10-7. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance is

recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display yourself after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT

If the vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset button toselect between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. When theSBZA system is turned off, the DICwill display the SIDE BLIND ZONE



ALERT SYSTEM OFF message asa reminder that the system hasbeen turned off. See ObjectDetection System Messages onpage 5-36 and Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) on page 9-35.

PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,press the vehicle information buttonuntil PARK ASSIST displays. Thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset button toselect between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. The URPAsystem automatically turns back onafter each vehicle start. When theURPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park), theDIC will display the PARK ASSISTOFF message as a reminder thatthe system has been turned off. SeeObject Detection System Messageson page 5-36 and UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9-34.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

If the vehicle has the Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA) system, thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset button toselect between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. When theRCTA system is turned off, the DICwill display the REAR CROSSTRAFFIC ALERT SYSTEM OFFmessage as a reminder that thesystem has been turned off. SeeObject Detection System Messageson page 5-36 and Rear VisionCamera (RVC) on page 9-37.

UNITS

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between metricor English units of measurement.Once in this display, press the set/reset button to select betweenMETRIC or ENGLISH units. All of

the vehicle information will then bedisplayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi). Pressthe vehicle information button untilthe DIC displays FRONTTIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicleinformation button again until theDIC displays REAR TIRES kPa(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising youadd air to a specific tire will appearin the display. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-44 and Tire Messages onpage 5-39 for more information.



If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

COMPASS ZONE SETTING

This display will be available if thevehicle has a compass. SeeCompass on page 5-4 for moreinformation.

COMPASS RECALIBRATION

This display will be available if thevehicle has a compass. SeeCompass on page 5-4 for moreinformation.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

ODOMETER

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either kilometers (km)or miles (mi). Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will alsodisplay the odometer.

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”earlier in this section.

TRIPA and TRIP B

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIPA or TRIP B displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) since the last reset foreach trip odometer. Both tripodometers can be used at the sametime. Pressing the trip odometerreset stem will also display the tripodometers.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing the set/reset button or the trip odometerreset stem while the desired tripodometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled retroactive reset. This can beused to set the trip odometer to thenumber of kilometers (miles) drivensince the ignition was last turned on.This can be used if the tripodometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retroactive reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 mi) before it is startedagain, and then the retroactive resetfeature is activated, the display willshow 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle



begins moving, the display will thenincrease to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km(5.2 mi), etc.

If the retroactive reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivenduring the last ignition cycle.

RANGE

Press the trip/fuel button untilRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate number ofremaining kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The display willshow LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, the

number may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving. Fuelrange cannot be reset.

AVG (Average) ECONOMY

Press the trip/fuel button until AVGECONOMY displays. This displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. To reset AVGECONOMY, press and hold the set/reset button.

TIMER

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This display can beused as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even ifanother display is being shown onthe DIC. The timer will record up to99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

FUEL USED

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELUSED displays. This display showsthe number of liters (L) orgallons (gal) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To reset



the fuel used information, press andhold the set/reset button while FUELUSED is displayed.

AVG (Average) SPEED

Press the trip/fuel button until AVGSPEED displays. This displayshows the average speed of thevehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Thisaverage is calculated based on thevarious vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. Toreset the value to zero, press andhold the set/reset button.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with the HUD, someinformation concerning theoperation of the vehicle is projectedonto the windshield. This includesthe speedometer reading, rpmreading, transmission position,outside air temperature, the manualmode gear range, and a briefdisplay of the current radio station,including SiriusXM information orCD track. It will also displayTurn-By-Turn navigation informationif equipped with a navigation radio.

The images are projected by theHUD lens on the driver side of theinstrument panel.

The language of the HUDinformation displayed can bechanged and the speedometerreading can be shown in eitherEnglish or metric units.

The language selection and theunits of measurement are changedthrough the trip computer in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-42.



HUD Display on the VehicleWindshield

The HUD information appears as animage focused out toward the frontof the vehicle.

When the ignition key is turned toON/RUN, the HUD will display anintroductory message for a shorttime, until the HUD is ready.

The following indicator lights comeon in the instrument panel whenactivated and also appear onthe HUD:. Turn Signal Indicators. High-Beam Indicator Symbol

The HUD temporarily displays somemessages that are on the DIC tripcomputer.

The HUD also displays the followingmessages on vehicles with thesesystems, when they are active:. TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE. STABILITRAK ACTIVE. Forward Collision Alert

{ Caution

If you try to use the HUD imageas a parking aid, you maymisjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

When the HUD is on, thespeedometer reading is continuallydisplayed. The current radio stationor CD track number will display for ashort period of time after the radioor CD track status changes. Thishappens whenever radio informationis changed. The speedometer sizeis reduced when radio, CDinformation, warnings,or Turn-By-Turn navigationinformation are displayed onthe HUD.

The HUD control is to the right ofthe steering wheel.



To adjust the HUD image so thatitems are properly displayed:

1. Adjust the driver seat to acomfortable position.

2. Start the engine.

3. Adjust the HUD controls.

Use the following settings to adjustthe HUD:

9 (Off): To turn HUD off, rotate thedimming knob fully counterclockwiseuntil the HUD display turns off.

Brightness: Turn the knob on theHUD control clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe display.

y (Up) orz (Down): Press the upor down arrows to center the HUDimage in your view. The HUD imagecan only be adjusted up and down,not side to side.

? (Page): Press this button toselect the display formats. Releasethe page button when the formatnumber with the desired display isshown on the HUD.

The HUD image displayed on thewindshield will automatically dimand brighten to compensate foroutside lighting.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal and willchange when the angle of thesunlight on the HUD displaychanges.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

The three formats are:

English

Metric

Format One: This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), turn signal indication,high-beam indication, transmissionpositions, and outside airtemperature.



English

Metric

Format Two: This display includesthe information in Format Onewithout the transmission informationand the outside air temperature.

English

Metric

Format Three: This displayincludes all the information inFormat One along with a circulartachometer, but without outside airtemperature.

All formats will show theTurn-By-Turn navigation informationand provide details about the nextdriving maneuver to be made. Whenyou near your destination, the HUDwill display a distance bar that willfill in the closer you get to yourdestination. All navigationinformation is provided to the HUDby the navigation radio, if thevehicle has one.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshieldas needed to remove any dirt or filmthat could reduce the sharpness orclarity of the HUD image.

To clean the HUD lens, use a soft,clean cloth that has household glasscleaner sprayed on it. Wipe theHUD lens gently, then dry it. Do notspray cleaner directly on the lensbecause the cleaner could leak intothe unit.



HUD Troubleshooting

Check that:. Nothing is covering the

HUD lens.. HUD brightness setting is not

too dim or too bright.. HUD is adjusted to the proper

height.. Polarized sunglasses are

not worn.. Windshield and HUD lens are

clean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See WindshieldReplacement on page 10-25.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by thedriver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you can pressany of the DIC buttons on theinstrument panel to acknowledgethat you received the messages andto clear them from the display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY LOW STARTVEHICLE

This message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage has dropped to a criticallevel and the engine must be startedto avoid a dead battery situation.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver systemstarts reducing certain features ofthe vehicle that you may be able tonotice. At the point that the featuresare disabled, this message isdisplayed. It means that the vehicleis trying to save the charge in thebattery.



Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in theinstrument cluster. See ChargingSystem Light on page 5-15. Drivingwith this problem could drain thebattery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System Warning

Light on page 5-18. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TOXXX

This message displays wheneverthe cruise control is set. See CruiseControl on page 9-30 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is shifted outof P (Park). Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door for

obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

HOOD OPEN

On some models, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thehood is not fully closed. Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the hoodfor obstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver side rear door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LIFTGATE OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the liftgate is open whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off



the vehicle and check the liftgate.Restart the vehicle and check forthe message on the DIC display.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger door is notfully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

POWER LIFTGATE OFF

This message displays when thepower liftgate has been turned offby pressing the power liftgate buttonon the center console.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, check

the door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5-12. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5-12.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10-18 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.



Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays whenservice is required for the vehicle.See your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 10-7 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2.

Acknowledging the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message willnot reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.See “Oil Life” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-23 and Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10-9.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10-7.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

This message displays when thevehicle's engine oil pressure is low.The oil pressure light also appearson the instrument cluster. SeeEngine Oil Pressure Light onpage 5-21.

Stop the vehicle immediately, asengine damage can result fromdriving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possiblewhen this message is displayed.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimesounds when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10-16for further information.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle's engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimesounds if the fuel level is low. Refuelas soon as possible. See FuelGauge on page 5-11 and Fuel onpage 9-42 for more information.



TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument cluster if the vehicle'sfuel cap is not tightened properly.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-16. Reinstall the fuel capfully. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-43. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap allowsfuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turnsignal lever to the off position.

Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISION ALERTUNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate the ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) system when itis temporarily unavailable. The FCAsystem does not need service.

This message could be due to thecamera being blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue.

FRT CAMERA BLOCKEDCLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when thecamera is blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue. The Lane Departure Warningsystem will not operate. ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) may not workor may not work as well.



LANE DEPARTURE SYSUNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) systemwhen it is temporarily unavailable.The LDW system does not needservice.

This message could be due to thecamera being blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue.

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL

This message displays if there issomething interfering with the parkassist system. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9-34.

PARK ASSIST OFF

After the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system has

been turned off. To turn the URPAsystem back on, see UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9-34.

REAR CROSS TRAFFICALERT SYSTEM OFF

If the vehicle has the Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA) system, thismessage displays when the RCTAsystem has been turned off. SeeRear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-37 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-23.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Do not use the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)features. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system. Donot use this system to help you

park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9-34 for more information.See your dealer for service.

SERVICE SIDE DETECTIONSYSTEM

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system and thismessage displays, both SBZAdisplays will remain on indicatingthere is a problem with the SBZAsystem. If these displays remain onafter continued driving, the systemneeds service. See your dealer. SeeSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9-35.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFF

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thismessage displays when the SBZAsystem has been turned off. SeeSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9-35 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-23.



SIDE DETECTION SYSTEMPORARILY OFF

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thismessage displays when the SBZAsystem is disabled because thesensor cannot detect vehicles inyour blind zone. The sensor may beblocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,or slush. This message may alsodisplay during heavy rain or due toroad spray. It may also come onwhen driving in isolated areas withno guardrails, trees, or road signsand light traffic. Your vehicle doesnot need service. For cleaninginstructions, see “Washing YourVehicle” in Exterior Care onpage 10-75. See Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) on page 9-35.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears, tryto reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealerfor service. The vehicle is safe todrive, however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-28 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-28.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned on. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-28. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-14 andAirbag System on page 3-23 formore information.



Security Messages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2-13 for moreinformation.

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the contenttheft-deterrent system has detecteda break-in attempt while you wereaway from your vehicle. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-11 formore information.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C (AirConditioning) SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heating

systems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if you noticea drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays when aproblem is detected with the powersteering system. When thismessage is displayed, you maynotice that the effort required tosteer the vehicle increases or feelsheavier, but you will still be able tosteer the vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer immediately.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays when yourvehicle's throttle system is notfunctioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

Tire Messages

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

This message also displays LEFTFRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (rightfront), LEFT RR (left rear),or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-21.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding air



until the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10-37, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-23.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5-21. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10-47 formore information. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when theTire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is relearning the tirepositions on your vehicle. The tirepositions must be relearned afterrotating the tires or after replacing atire or sensor. See Tire Rotation onpage 10-50, Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-46, and TirePressure on page 10-44 for moreinformation.

Transmission Messages

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when there is a temporarycondition making the AWD systemunavailable. The vehicle will run in2WD. This could be caused by:. A compact spare tire on the

vehicle. AWD system overheat. Loss of wheel or vehicle speed

. Certain other vehicle electricalconditions

This message turns off when thecompact spare tire is replaced by afull-size tire, the differential fluidcools or the above conditions are nolonger present and the warningmessage is reset. To reset thewarning message manually, turn theignition off and then back on againafter 30 seconds. If the messagestays on, see your dealer. SeeAll-Wheel Drive on page 9-25.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE

This message displays if a problemoccurs with the All-Wheel Drive(AWD) system. The vehicle will runin 2WD. This could be caused by:. An electronics problem. Worn out or overheated clutch

plates. Various electrical issues

If this message appears, stop assoon as possible and turn off theignition for 30 seconds. Restart thevehicle and check for the message



on the DIC display. If the messagestill displays or appears again whenyou begin driving, the system needsservice. See your dealer right away.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

{ Caution

Do not drive the vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating,or the transmission can bedamaged. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty.

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.

Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TO XXXKM/H (MPH)

This message displays when yourvehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h(80 mph) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speedvariable assist steering system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer fluid reservoiras soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10-19 for more information.



VehiclePersonalizationYour vehicle may havecustomization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization buttonto enter the feature settingsmenu. If the menu is notavailable, FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle isin P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.



NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2-7.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2-7.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-2.



Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-2.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doorsand liftgate with the power door lockswitch and a door or the liftgate isopen, this feature will delay lockingthe doors and liftgate untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or the



lock button on the RKE transmittertwice. See Delayed Locking onpage 2-7.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor or the liftgate is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when it

is dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,



or the vehicle is no longer off. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


PARK TILT MIRRORS

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select whether or notthe outside mirror(s) willautomatically tilt down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2-17.

Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driveroutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver andpassenger outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).



EASY EXIT SEAT

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seatfeature. See Memory Seats onpage 3-6.



Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SEAT appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seatexit recall will occur.

ON: The driver seat will move backwhen the key is removed from theignition. The steering column willalso move up and forward onvehicles with the power tilt andtelescopic steering feature. SeeSteering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat andsteering column will stay in the

original exit position, unless amemory recall took place prior toremoving the key again.



MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the remote memory seat recallfeature. See Memory Seats onpage 3-6.

Press the customization button untilMEMORY SEAT RECALL appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.

ON: The driver seat and outsidemirrors will automatically move tothe stored driving position when theunlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed. The steering column willalso move on vehicles with thepower tilt and telescopic steeringfeature. See Steering WheelAdjustment on page 5-2. See“Memory Remote Recall” underMemory Seats on page 3-6 forinformation on matching transmittersto driver positions.



REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using the



Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-4.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization button untilFEATURE SETTINGS PRESS VTO EXIT appears in the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toexit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is shifted out of

P (Park).. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40-second time period haselapsed with no selection made.



Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. Theseinstructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quicker andmore accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.



2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releaseeither button until the indicatorlight changes from a slow to arapid flash. Then release bothbuttons.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2with the procedure under “RadioSignals for Canada and SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicator lightand garage door activation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside the garage on the garagedoor opener receiver. The nameand color of the button may varyby manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote system buttonfor two seconds, then release it.



If the garage door does notmove or the lamp on the garagedoor opener receiver does notflash, press and hold the samebutton a second time fortwo seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does not moveor the garage door lamp doesnot flash, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming help,call 1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.



Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together with theother exterior lamps and instrumentpanel lights.


6-2 Lighting

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.A warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened when the ignitionswitch is off and the headlampsare on.

# (Fog Lamps): If equipped, itturns the fog lamps on or off.

See Fog Lamps on page 6-4.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signallever away from you to turn the highbeams on.

Pull the lever toward you to return tolow beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow-beam position, pull the turnsignal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp SystemDRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/RUN

position.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, the regularheadlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,and other lamps will not be on. Theinstrument cluster will not be lit.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on the


Lighting 6-3

darkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will go off and theDRL will come on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel because itworks with the DRL.

Delayed HeadlampsDelayed headlamps provide aperiod of exterior lighting as youleave the area around the vehicle.This feature is activated when theheadlamps are on due to theautomatic headlamps control featureand when the ignition is turned off.The headlamps remain on until theexterior lamp control is moved to theparking lamps position or until thepre-selected delayed headlamplighting period has ended.

If the ignition is turned off with theexterior lamp control in the;or5 position, the delayedheadlamps cycle will not occur.

To disable the delayed headlampsfeature or change the time of delay,see Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-42.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash on

and off. This warns others that youare having trouble. Press again toturn the flashers off.

The turn signals do not work whilethe hazard warning flashers are on.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.


6-4 Lighting

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10-28.

Turn Signal On Chime

If either one of the turn signals is lefton and the vehicle has been drivenmore than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimewill sound.

Fog Lamps

Use the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.

The fog lamp button is on theexterior lamp control to the left ofthe steering column.

# (Fog Lamps): Press this buttonto turn the fog lamps on or off.A light comes on in the instrumentcluster when the fog lamps are inuse. The ignition must be on for thefog lamps to work.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps turn off.The fog lamps come back on againwhen the high-beam headlamps areturned off.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.


Lighting 6-5

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The instrument panel brightnessknob is located on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringcolumn.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Push the knob in allthe way until it extends out and thenturn the knob clockwise or

counterclockwise to brighten or dimthe lights. Push the knob back inwhen finished.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps automaticallycome on when a door is opened.The lamps can also be turned onmanually by fully turning theinstrument panel brightness controlclockwise.

The reading lamps, located on theheadliner above the rearview mirror,can be turned on or offindependently of the automaticcourtesy lamps, when the doors areclosed.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps are in theoverhead console and above therear seat passengers.

The dome lamps come on when adoor is opened, unless the domelamp override button is pressed in.

The lamps can also be turned onand off by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwiseto the farthest position.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button isnext to the exterior lamps control.

E DOME OFF (Dome LampOverride): Press the button andthe dome lamps remain off when adoor is opened. An indicator light onthe button comes on to show that


6-6 Lighting

the dome lamps are off. Press thebutton again so the dome lampscome on when a door is opened.

AMBIENT OFF (If Equipped):Press the button to turn the ambientlights off. Press the button again toturn ambient lights on.

Reading LampsPress the button near each lamp toturn them on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingFor vehicles with courtesy lamps,they come on and stay on for a settime whenever K is pressed on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

If a door is opened, the lamps stayon while it is open and then turn offautomatically about 20 secondsafter the door is closed. If K ispressed and no door is opened, thelamps turn off after about20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a featurecalled theater dimming. With theaterdimming, the lamps do not turn offat the end of the delay time.Instead, they slowly dim and thengo out. The delay time is canceled ifthe ignition key is turned to ON/RUNor the power door lock switch ispressed. The lamps will dimright away.

When the ignition is on, illuminatedentry is inactive, which means thecourtesy lamps will not come onunless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminatesthe interior for a period of time afterall the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayedentry lighting to work. Immediatelyafter all the doors have been closed,the delayed entry lighting featurecontinues to work until one of thefollowing occurs:. The ignition is in ON/RUN.. The doors are locked.. An illumination period of about

25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period adoor is opened, the timedillumination period is canceled andthe interior lamps remain on.


Lighting 6-7

Delayed Exit LightingDelayed exit lighting illuminates theinterior for a period of time after thekey is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayedexit lighting to work. When the keyis removed, interior illuminationactivates and remains on until oneof the following occurs:. The ignition is in ON/RUN.. The power door locks are

activated.. An illumination period of

20 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period adoor is opened, the timedillumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain onbecause a door is open.

Parade DimmingThis feature automatically prohibitsthe dimming of the instrument paneldisplays in daylight while theheadlamps are on so that thedisplays are still able to be seen.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.

When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all of thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, rearwindow defogger, climate control fanat high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loadsplugged into accessory poweroutlets.


6-8 Lighting

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays, itis recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-23.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature helps prevent thebattery from being drained, if theinterior courtesy lamps or readinglamps are accidentally left on. If anyof these lamps are left on, theyautomatically turn off after10 minutes, if the ignition is off. Thelamps will not come back on againuntil one of the following occurs:. The ignition is turned on.. The exterior lamps control is

turned off, then on again.

The headlamps will time out after10 minutes, if they are manuallyturned on while the ignition is onor off.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Rear AudioController (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

SettingsSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with theinfotainment system featured in thisowner manual.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingany infotainment features cancause a crash resulting in injuryor death. Do not give extendedattention to infotainment taskswhile driving. Focus your attentionon driving and limit glances to theinstrument cluster or center stackscreens. Use voice guidancewhenever possible.


7-2 Infotainment System

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help with thisby disabling some functions whendriving. A grayed-out function is notavailable when the vehicle ismoving.

All functions are available when thevehicle is parked. Before driving:. Become familiar with the

infotainment system operationand buttons on the faceplate.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or a single voicecommand for vehicles equippedwith phone capability.

See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-18.

The vehicle has a base radioincluded in this manual. See theseparate infotainment manual forinformation on the uplevel radios,audio players, phone, navigationsystem, and voice or speechrecognition. There is alsoinformation on settings anddownloadable applications (ifequipped).

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.



OverviewThe infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons, touch screen,steering wheel controls, and voice recognition. See Operation on page 7-3.

1. PUSH/O (Volume/Power)

2. Z (Eject)

3. CD Slot

4. AUX Port

5. PUSH/SEL (Select)

6. D (Home Page)

7. SRCE (Source)

8. FAV (Favorites Menu)

9. © SEEK (Previous/Reverse)

10. SEEK¨ (Next/Forward)

11. / BACK

Operation

Infotainment Controls

PUSH/O (Volume/Power):

. Press to turn the system onand off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a discfrom the CD. See CD Player onpage 7-12.

AUX Port: 3.5 mm (1/8 in)connection for external audiodevices.

PUSH/SEL (Select):. Turn to manually find a station or

highlight a menu selection.. Press to select a highlighted

selection.



D (Home Page): Press to go tothe Home Page. See “Home Page”in this section.

SRCE (Source): Press to changethe audio source to AM, FM,SiriusXM® (if equipped), CD, USB,iPod, or AUX.

FAV (Favorites Menu): In AM, FM,or SiriusXM, press to display orchange the current favorite pagenumber above the preset buttons.Keep pressing to scroll through thefavorites pages. The stored stationsfor each list display on the bottom ofthe screen. The number of presetFavorite Pages can be changed bypressing the Settings button on aHome Page, then pressingFavorites Pages, and then selectingthe number of Favorite Pages.

© SEEK (Previous/Reverse):

1. AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped):Press to seek to the previousstrong station. Press and holdfor Scan. Press © again to stopthe scan.

2. CD, USB: Press to seek to thebeginning of the current orprevious track.

3. CD, USB: Press and hold toquickly reverse through a track.Release the button to return toplaying speed. See CD Playeron page 7-12 and AuxiliaryDevices on page 7-17.

SEEK ¨ (Next/Forward):1. AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped):

Press to seek to the next strongstation. Press and hold for Scan.Press ¨ again to stop the scan.

2. CD, USB: Press to seek or skipthe next track or program.

3. CD, USB: Press and hold to fastforward through a track. Releasethe button to return to playingspeed. See CD Player onpage 7-12 and Auxiliary Deviceson page 7-17.

/ BACK: Press to return to theprevious screen in a menu.

Touchscreen Buttons

Touchscreen buttons show visiblyon the screen when available. Whena function is unavailable, the buttonmay gray-out. When a function isselected, the button may highlight,or animate.

Home Page

The infotainment system displays aHome Page to access all of theapplications. The current selectedsource is framed with a red boxoutline.

Back: Press to go back to theprevious page or menu.



Home: From any page, press tocycle through the Home Pages tostart a different application. TheHome Page can have up to threepages with eight icons per page .Each of these three pages can becustomized to contain your choiceof up to eight per screen. They mayalso be re-ordered on each screento taste.

FAV (Favorites): Press to displaythe favorite list or add a favorite.

g (Voice Recognition): Press tobegin voice recognition. SeeBluetooth on page 7-20.

Menu: Press to enter the HomePage menu.

More r : Press to go to the nextHome Page.

Home Page Features

Some features are disabled whenthe vehicle is moving and someicons may not be active.

Now Playing: Press to display theactive source page. The sourcesavailable are AM, FM, XM (ifequipped), CD, USB, Bluetooth,or AUX Input.

} (Navigation): Press to displaythe OnStar® Turn-by-TurnNavigation (if equipped). See“OnStar,” if equipped.

5 (Phone): Press to display thePhone main page. See Bluetooth onpage 7-20.

Settings: Press to display theSettings menu. See Settings onpage 7-27.

Tone : Press to display the ToneSettings menu. The following maydisplay:

Tone Settings: Press to adjust thetone settings. The following maydisplay:

. EQ: Press o or p to adjust theequalizer.

. Bass: Press + or − to adjustthe bass.

. Middle: Press + or − to adjustthe middle.

. Treble: Press + or − to adjust thetreble.

. Balance: Press L to hear moresound from the left speakers orR for more sound from the rightspeakers. The middle positionbalances the sound between theleft and right speakers.



. Fade: Press F for more soundfrom the front speakers or R formore sound from the rearspeakers. The middle positionbalances the sound between thefront and rear speakers.

DSP Mode: Press o or p to adjustthe DSP mode (if equipped).

Language

To change the language of thescreens. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-42.

English or Metric Units

To change the screens from Englishor metric. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-23.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

PUSH/O (Power/Volume):

. Press to turn the radio on or off.

. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume of the active source.

The steering wheel controls canalso be used to adjust the volume.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

Audio Source

To access AM, FM, or SiriusXM® ifequipped, do one of the following:. Press the AM, FM, or XM (if

equipped) screen button.. Press the SRCE radio button to

scroll through the options.A source ribbon will appear atthe bottom of the screenallowing you to select the oneyou want.

Infotainment System Settings

Tone Settings

To access the tone settings, pressthe Tone Settings button on theHome Page.

To adjust the settings:. Bass: Press + or − to change

the level.. Middle: Press + or − to change

the level.. Treble: Press + or − to change

the level.

. EQ: Press o or p to scrollthrough the preset EQ options.

. DSP Mode: Press o or p toscroll through the preset DSPmodes.

. Fade: Press the F or R buttonfor more sound from the front orrear speakers. The middleposition balances the soundbetween the front and rearspeakers.



. Balance: Press the L or R buttonfor more sound from the left orright speakers. The middleposition balances the soundbetween the left and rightspeakers.

Finding a Station

Press SRCE to select AM, FM,or SiriusXM (if equipped).

Turn the PUSH/SEL knob to find aradio station. To select a presetstation, press FAV to scroll throughthe favorite pages and then press apreset button on the radio or thescreen button.

Seeking a Station

Press © SEEK or SEEK¨ to searchfor a station. You may also use the¨ on the steering wheelcontrol (SWC).

AM

To access the AM menu press theMenu screen button and thefollowing may display:

Favorites List : Press to displaythe AM favorites list.

AM Station List : Press to displaya list of AM stations.

Update Station List : Press todisplay the list of AM stations. Pressrefresh to update the list.

Tag Song : Press to tag a song todownload to an iPod when it isconnected to be purchased at alater time.

HD Enable/Disable: Press to turnthe HD Radio receiver on or off.This feature is not available inSiriusXM if equipped.

FM



To access the FM Menu press theMenu screen button and thefollowing may display:

Favorites List : Press to displaythe FM favorites list.

FM Station List : Press to displaya list of FM stations.

FM Category List : Press todisplay a list of FM categories.

Update Station List: Press todisplay the list of FM stations. Pressrefresh to update the list.

Tag Song : Press to tag a song todownload to an iPod when it isconnected to be purchased at alater time.

HD Enable/Disable: Press to turnthe HD Radio receiver on or off.

SiriusXM (If Equipped)

To access the XM Menu press theMenu screen button and thefollowing may display:

Favorites List : Press to displaythe SiriusXM favorites list.

XM Channel List : Press to displaya list of SiriusXM channels.

XM Category List : Press todisplay a list of SiriusXM categories.

Tune Select : If equipped withSiriusXM, press and the followingmay display:. Artist: Press to set an audio alert

when the current artist is playingon a SiriusXM channel.

. Song: Press to set an audio alertwhen the current song is playingon a SiriusXM channel.

. Tune Select Manager: PressDisable/Enable All Alerts toenable or disable all alerts.A checkmark next to the alertmeans it is turned on. Press analert to turn it off. Press Deleteto delete an alert.



. Audible Alert: This feature willgive an audio alert when certainartists or songs are available ona specific station. Press to turnon or off.

Storing Radio Station Presets

Up to 30 preset stations can bestored. AM, FM, and SiriusXM (ifequipped) can be mixed.

1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXMmain page, press and hold any 1−5 buttons or one of the presetscreen buttons at the bottom ofthe screen. After a few seconds,a beep is heard and the newpreset information displays onthat screen button.

2. Repeat for each preset.

Mixed-Band Presets

Each favorite page can storefive preset stations. The presetswithin a page can be from differentradio bands.

To scroll through the pages, pressFAV or the FAV screen button on thetop bar. The current page numberdisplays above the preset buttons.The stored stations for each favoritepage display on the preset buttons.

To change the number of favoritepages displayed:

1. Press Settings on theHome Page.

2. Press Favorite Pages.

3. Select the number of pages todisplay.

Recalling a Preset Station

To recall a preset station from afavorites page, do one the following:. Press the FAV screen button at

the top bar to display the presetpop-up. Press one of the presetscreen buttons to go to theselected preset station.

. In the AM, FM, or SiriusXM (ifequipped) main page, press oneof the preset screen buttons togo to the selected preset station.

Satellite RadioVehicles with a valid SiriusXM®

satellite radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.For more information, seewww.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

When SiriusXM is active, the stationname, number, category name,song title, and artist display on thescreen. SiriusXM may update thebackground picture at any time.

SiriusXM Categories

SiriusXM stations are organized incategories.



Adding or Removing SiriusXMCategories

Using the home page:

1. Press the Settings screen buttonon the Home Page.

2. Select XM Categories.

3. Select or deselect a category.A checkmark will indicate thatthe category is selected.

Press “Show All XM Categories” torestore all SiriusXM categories.

Using the XM playing screen:

1. Press the Menu screen button.

2. Select XM Categories.

3. Select or deselect a category.A checkmark will indicate thatthe category is selected.

SiriusXM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These stations, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.),and 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated. Noaction is required.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed.

Channel Off Air: This station is notcurrently in service.

Channel Unauth: This station isblocked or cannot be received.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned station is nolonger assigned.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this station.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this station.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this station.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on this station.

No XM Signal: The vehicle may bein a location where the SiriusXMsignal is being blocked. When thevehicle is moved into an open area,the signal should return.

CAT Not Found: There are nostations available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to station 0,this message alternates with theSiriusXM radio eight-digit radio IDlabel. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to station 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.



Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can also occur

when things like storms and powerlines interfere with radio reception.When this happens, try reducing thetreble on the radio.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Serviceprovides digital radio reception. Tallbuildings or hills can interfere withsatellite radio signals, causing thesound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing underheavy foliage, bridges, garages,or tunnels may cause loss of theSiriusXM signal for a period of time.

Cell Phone Usage

Cell phone usage, such as makingor receiving phone calls, charging,or just having the phone on maycause static interference in theradio. Unplug the phone or turn it offif this happens.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is locatedon the roof of the vehicle. This typeof antenna is used with the AM/FMradio, as well as OnStar and theSiriusXM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, if the vehicle has thesefeatures. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radioreception. If the vehicle has asunroof, the performance of theradio system may be affected if thesunroof is open. Loading items ontothe roof of the vehicle can interferewith the performance of the radiosystem and, if the vehicle has thisfeature, OnStar. Make sure themulti-band antenna is notobstructed.



Audio Players

CD PlayerThe player can be used for CD,MP3 audio, and Video.

With the vehicle on, insert a discinto the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and begins playing.

The system is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3 or unprotected WMA

formats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to disc quality,the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has beenrecorded, or the way the disc hasbeen handled.

There can be increased skipping,difficulty in recording tracks,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or

difficulty in loading and ejecting.If these problems occur, check thedisc for damage or try a knowngood disc.

To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or

damaged discs.. Do not apply labels to discs. The

labels could get caught in theplayer.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

. Use a marking pen to label thetop of the disc.

Loading and Ejecting Discs

To load a disc:

1. Turn the vehicle on.

2. Insert a disc into the slot, labelside up. The player pulls it in therest of the way. If the disc is

damaged or improperly loaded,there is an error and the discejects.

The disc automatically plays onceloaded.

PressZ to eject a disc from theCD player. If the disc is not removedwithin a short period of time, it isautomatically pulled back into theplayer.

Playing an Audio CD

1. Press the Discscreen button onthe Home Page or selectthe disc.

2. From the Discscreen, press theMenu screen button to displaythe menu options.

3. Press to select the desiredoption.

On the Disc main page a tracknumber displays at the beginning ofeach track. Song, Artist, ElapsedTme, and Album informationdisplays when available.



Use the following controls to playthe disc:

© SEEK:. Press to seek to the beginning of

the current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than eight seconds, it seeksto the previous track. If longerthan eight seconds, the currenttrack starts from the beginning.

. Press and hold to fast reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

SEEK¨:. Press to seek to the next track.. Press and hold to fast forward

through a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

PUSH/SEL (Select): Turn to theright or left to select the next orprevious track.

Error Messages

If Disc Error displays and/or the disccomes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:. The disc has an invalid or

unknown format.. The disc is very hot. Try the disc

again when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.

MP3

Playing an MP3 CD

To play an MP3 CD, follow the sameinstructions as “Playing anAudio CD.”

The following guidelines must bemet when creating an MP3 disc,otherwise the CD might not play:. Sampling rate: 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.

. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,and 320 kbps.

. Maximum number of folders:eight folders with 255 files perfolder.

. Maximum of 1,000 files ona disc.

. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RWwith a maximum capacity of700 MB.



. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/Genre information requires a CDto be fully scanned before themusic navigator works withthese menus.

MP3 Audio

Press the Menu screen button whilethat source is active to access theCD Audio Menu.

Press any of the following buttonson the CD Audio Menu:

Folders: Press to view the foldersstored on the disc. Select a folder toview the list of all songs in thatfolder. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Playlists: Press to view theplaylists stored on the disc. Select aplaylist to view the list of all songs inthat playlist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Artists: Press to view the list ofartists stored on the disc. Select anartist name to view a list of all songs

by the artist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Genres: Press to view the genres.Select a genre to view a list of allsongs of that genre. Select a songfrom the list to begin playback.

Albums: Press to view the albumson the disc. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Composers: Press to view theComposers stored on the disc.There might be a delay before thelist displays. The Composers menudisplays. Select a composer todisplay a list of albums from thecomposer.

Tracks (Song Titles): Press todisplay a list of all songs on thedisc. Songs are displayed as storedon the disc. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. To beginplayback, select a song from the list.



Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. All files contained directlyunder the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders.

Empty Folders

If a root directory or folder is emptyor contains only folders, the playeradvances to the next folder in thefile structure that contains acompressed audio file. The emptyfolder(s) are not displayed ornumbered.

No Folder

When the CD only containscompressed audio files without anyfolders or playlists, all files areunder the root folder.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file's ID3tag and are only displayed if presentin the tag. If a song title is not

present in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name as thetrack name.

Preprogrammed Playlists

The radio recognizespreprogrammed playlists; however,there is no editing capability. Theseplaylists are treated as specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files.

Music Navigator

Folders

The folder structure can support upto five levels of depth. The foldersand then songs will display inalphabetical order.

Press one of the options from theRoot Folder to display other foldersof that option type. Keep pressing todisplay each screen until all levelshave been reached. The last levelusually contains the desired songto play.

Playlists



Press the Playlist screen buttondisplayed on the Root Folder menu.The Playlist menu displays.

Select one of the options listed onthe Playlist menu. A list displayingthe song titles, then Artistsassociated with the titles appear.

Artists

Press the Artist screen buttondisplayed on the Root Folder menu.The Artist menu displays.

Select an artist from the Artist menuto display a list of albums.

Albums

Select an album from the Albumsmenu to display a list of songs.Select a song for playback.

Genres

Press the Genre screen buttondisplayed on the Root Folder menu.The Genre menu displays.

Follow the same instructions asgiven for Artist. Each menuselection will eventually lead to thesong for playback.

Tracks

Press the Song Titles screen buttondisplayed on the Root Folder menu.The Song Titles menu displays.Select the desired song forplayback.



Composers

Press the Composers screen buttondisplayed on the Root Folder menu.The Composers menu displays.Select a composer to display a listof Albums from the composer.

Select the Album to display a list ofsongs. Select the desired song forplayback.

Auxiliary DevicesThe vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary input jack on the faceplateand a USB port in the instrumentpanel storage area.

If equipped, there are two USBports on the rear of the centerconsole that can be used forcharging only. They can chargedevices that draw 2.1 amps or less.See the device’s owner manual forthe specification.

Using the 3.5mm (1/8 in)Auxiliary Input Jack

This is not an audio output; do notplug a headphone set into the frontauxiliary input jack. Connect anauxiliary input device such as aniPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD player, or cassette tape playerto the auxiliary input jack for use asanother source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9-3 formore information on driverdistraction.

To use an auxiliary input device,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.

Press SRCE to select the device.

Using the USB Port

The USB port is in the instrumentpanel storage area. See InstrumentPanel Storage on page 4-1.

The USB port can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs. See MP3on page 7-13 for information abouthow to connect and control a USBstorage device or an iPod.



USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives. Fifth generation or later iPod. iPod classic® (6th generation). iPod nano® (3G, 4G, 5G,

and 6G). iPod touch® (1G, 2G, 3G,

and 4G). iPhone® (2G, 3G, 3GS, 4, and 5). iPad® (1G, 2G)

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help identifying your iPod, go towww.apple.com/support.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemIf equipped with RSA, rear seatpassengers can listen to and controlany of the music sources: radio,CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliarysources. The rear seat passengerscan only control the music sourcesthe front seat passengers are notlistening to (except on some radioswhere dual control is allowed). Forexample, rear seat passengers cancontrol a CD and listen to it throughthe headphones, while the driverlistens to the radio through the frontspeakers. The rear seat passengershave control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The RSA functions operate evenwhen the main radio is off. The frontaudio system displaysX when theRSA is on, and disappears from thedisplay when it is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

The audio system mutes the rearspeakers when the RSA audio isactive through the headphones.

To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the front auxiliary input (ifavailable), located on the front audiosystem. Turn the iPod on, thenchoose the front auxiliary input withthe RSA SRCE button.



P (Power): Press to turn the RSAon or off.

Volume: Turn to increase or todecrease the volume of the wiredheadphones. The left knob controlsthe left headphones and the rightknob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press to selectbetween the radio, CD, and if thevehicle has these features, DVD,front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

© ¨ (Seek): Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

Press and hold © or ¨ until thedisplay flashes to tune to anindividual station. The display stopsflashing after the buttons have notbeen pushed for more thantwo seconds. This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

While listening to a disc, press ¨ togo to the next track or chapter onthe disc. Press © to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter(if more than 10 seconds haveplayed). This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press © or ¨ to perform acursor up or down on the menu.Hold © or ¨ to perform a cursor leftor right on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press to go tothe next preset radio station orchannel set on the main radio. Thisfunction is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press PROG to go to thebeginning of the CD or DVD audio.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.

When a disc is playing in the CD orDVD changer, press PROG toselect the next disc, if multiple discsare loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press PROG to performthe ENTER menu function.

Rear AudioController (RAC)

If equipped, certain radio functionscan be controlled with RAC.

xw (Next/Previous): Press thedown or up arrows to go to the nextor to the previous radio stationstored as a favorite.



When a CD/DVD is playing, pressthe down or up arrows to go to thenext or previous track or chapter.

© SEEK ¨ : Press the SEEKarrows to go to the previous or tothe next radio station while in AM,FM, or SiriusXM® (if equipped).Press the SEEK arrows to go to theprevious or to the next track orchapter while sourced to a CD orDVD slot.

SRCE (Source): Press this buttonto switch between the radio (AM,FM), SiriusXM (if equipped), CD,and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary, andrear auxiliary.

> (Mute): Press this button tosilence the system. Press thisbutton again, or any other radiobutton, to turn the sound on.

+ / − x (Volume): Press the plus orminus buttons to increase or todecrease the volume.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth-capable cell phone with aHands-Free Profile to make and



receive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

c /x (End): Press to end a call,reject a call, or cancel an operation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if equipped. See “OnStar” ifequipped.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.



. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command

can be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”


3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.



Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.


3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the last



digit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say “911.”

4. Say "Dial" or "Call.”

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.



1. Press b / g.2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command

1. Press b / g.2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g ,and then say “Un-mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.



The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command

can be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling a

menu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.



Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

SettingsPress Settings on the Home Pageto adjust features and preferences,such as Time, Date, BluetoothDevice List, Voice Recognition,Favorite Pages, Display Settings,Navigation Settings, etc.

1. Press the Settings screen buttonon the Home Page.

2. Touch-tap the scroll bar until thedesired option displays. Selectthe desired settings to change.

A few of the setting options changethe way the navigation systemdisplays or reacts while in use.

From the Settings menu, press theSet Time or Set Date settingsscreen button to display the differentoptions for setting the timeand date.

Bluetooth Device List: Press todisplay paired bluetooth devices.

Voice Recognition: Press todisplay voice recognition options.. Voice Prompt Volume: Press to

adjust the prompt volume.. Prompt Length: Press to select

short or long prompts.



Favorite Pages : Press to selectthe number of favorite pagesdisplayed on the screen. The choiceis 1–6 pages.

Display Settings : Press to adjustthe screen settings.. The Auto setting adjusts the

screen background automaticallydepending on the exteriorlighting conditions.

. The Day setting brightens themap background.

. The Night setting darkens themap background.

Speed Dependent Volume :Select OFF, Low, Medium, or Highsensitivity to automatically adjustthe volume to minimize the effectsof unwanted background noise thatcan result from changing roadsurfaces, driving speeds, or openwindows. This feature works best atlower volume settings wherebackground noise is typically louderthan the sound system volume.

Startup Volume : Press to set themaximum volume level for startupthat will be used even if a highervolume had been set when the radiowas turned off.

Radio Favorites : Press to selectthe number of FAV pages to beused in the system.

Add/Remove XM Categories :Press to customize which availableXM Categories are displayed andused in the system.

RDS Settings : Press to customizestation name and radio text displayoptions.









Radio Settings

Press the Config button on theHome Page or the CONFIG buttonon the faceplate to enter the menuoptions. Turn the PUSH/SEL knobor touch-tap the scroll bar to scrollthrough the available options. Pressthe PUSH/SEL knob or press RadioSettings to display the radio settingsmenu. Press this feature to makechanges for radio informationdisplayed, preset pages, AutoVolume Control, and XM CategoriesRestore. See Satellite Radio onpage 7-9 (if equipped), for moreinformation about XM Categories.



The Radio Settings are:

Phone Settings

See Bluetooth on page 7-20 in the“Phone” section for moreinformation on phone settings.

Vehicle Settings

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-42.

Display

Mode : Press Mode to change thescreen background. This settingcontrols map colors.

Calibrate Touchscreen : Press todisplay the Touchscreen CalibrationScreen.

Turn Display Off : Press to turnthe Display option off.

Rear Vision Camera (IfEquipped)

The rear vision camera can assistthe driver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle.

An image appears on the system’sscreen so that the driver can checkthe surroundings for safety.

Press the Config button to accessthe Display Settings.

Symbols : Press to enable ordisable the Rear Park Assist (RPA)symbols presented over the rearcamera video.

Guidelines : Press to enable ordisable the RPA dynamic guidelinespresented over the rear cameravideo.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-37.



Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS Inc. AllRights Reserved.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Rear Climate Control System(with Rear Seat Audio) . . . . . 8-10

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Fan Control



4. Recirculation


6. Air Conditioning


9 (Off): Turn the fan control all theway counterclockwise to turn thefront climate control system off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.


8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature of the air flowing fromthe system.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

By positioning the right knobbetween two modes, a combinationof those two modes is selected.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtoward the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the system

automatically selects outside air.Recirculation cannot be selectedwhile in floor mode.

- (Defog): This clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning unless theoutside temperature is less than 4°C(40°F). Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defog mode.Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

0 (Defrost): This clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents,with some to the floor vents. In thismode, outside air is pulled insidethe vehicle. Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defrost mode.The air conditioning system runsautomatically in this setting, unlessthe outside temperature is less than4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicleuntil all windows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes onwhen A/C is on. The air conditioningsystem does not operate when theoutside temperature is below 4°C(40°F). The indicator light flashesthree times and turns off whenoutside conditions affect airconditioning operation. This isnormal.

For quicker cool down on hot days:

1. Open the windows to let hot airescape.

2. SelectH mode.

3. Select#.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

6. Close the windows after the hotair has escaped.

7. Once the vehicle's interiortemperature is below the outsidetemperature, select@ modefor faster cooling.



Using recirculation for long periodsof time could cause the air insidethe vehicle to become too dry. Toprevent this from happening, afterthe inside of the vehicle has cooled,turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, sowater might drip under the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and must bere-selected when the engine isturned on again.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defrost, or defoggingmodes. If recirculation is selected in

these modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off. The airconditioning also comes on whenthis mode is activated unless theoutside air temperature is less than4°C (40°F). While in recirculationmode the windows can fog whenthe weather is cold and damp. Toclear the fog, select either the defogor defrost mode and increase thefan speed.

REAR (Rear Climate Control):Press to turn the rear heating andair conditioning on or off. See RearClimate Control System on page 8-9or Rear Climate Control System(with Rear Seat Audio) onpage 8-10.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rear windowdefogger stays on for about10 minutes, before automatically

turning off. The defogger will alsoturn off when the engine isturned off.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of themirror when1 is pressed.

{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna ordefogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.



Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Driver and Passenger SideTemperature Controls

2. Air Delivery Mode Controls

3. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

4. AUTO (Automatic Operation)


6. Defrost


8. Fan Control

9. Recirculation

10. Air Conditioning

Display Function

Each time the temperature, mode,or fan controls are adjusted, theclimate control display shows thatfunction along with the insidetemperature setting. The outsidetemperature is displayed on theinstrument cluster.

( (On/Off): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to turn the climatecontrol system on or off.

The climate control system will alsoturn on if the defrost, AUTO, or airconditioning buttons are pressed.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): The systemautomatically controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery, andthe fan speed.



To use automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected, thecurrent temperature(s) isdisplayed and the AUTOindicator light is on.

When AUTO is selected, the airconditioning and air inlet areautomatically controlled. The airconditioning runs when theoutside temperature is over 4°C(40°F). The system isautomatically set to outside air,unless it is hot outside and thenthe air inlet changes torecirculation mode to helpquickly cool the vehicle. Therecirculation indicator light willcome on.

2. Set the temperature for thedriver and passenger.

To find a comfortable setting,start with a 22°C (73°F)temperature setting and allowabout 20 minutes for the systemto regulate. Use the driver sideor passenger side temperaturecontrol to adjust the temperaturesetting as necessary. Thesystem will remain at theselected setting. Choosing thewarmest or coolest temperaturesdoes not cause the vehicle toheat or cool more quickly.

To avoid blowing cold air in coldweather, the system delaysturning on the fan until warm airis available. Turn the fan knob tooverride this delay and selectthe fan speed.

Temperature Control

The driver and passenger sidetemperature controls are used toadjust the temperature of the aircoming through the system. Thetemperature can be adjusted even if

the system is turned off sinceoutside air still enters the vehicle,unless the recirculation mode isselected. See “Recirculation” later inthis section.

Driver Side TemperatureControl: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver sidetemperature. The driver sidetemperature display will show thetemperature setting.

Passenger Side TemperatureControl: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the passenger sidetemperature. The passenger sidedisplay will show the temperaturesetting.

SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature): Press to set thepassenger temperature to match thedriver temperature setting.

Manual Operation

The air delivery mode or fan speedcan be manually adjusted.



9 (Fan Control): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

Turning the fan control knob while inautomatic control places the fanspeed under manual control.

The air delivery mode remains inautomatic control. The fan settingdisplays momentarily and then nolonger displays.

Air Delivery Modes: PressH,),6, or- to change the direction ofthe airflow in the vehicle. Anindicator light comes on in theselected mode button. Pressing amode button while the system is offchanges the air delivery modewithout turning the system on.Changing the air delivery modewhile in automatic control places thesystem into manual control. The airdelivery mode button indicatordisplays, and the AUTO buttonindicator light turns off.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtowards the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the systemuses outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature isless than 4°C (40°F). Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows areclear.

0 (Defrost): Press to turn thedefrost on or off. This mode quicklyclears the windshield of fog or frost.

Air is directed to the windshield,side window, and floor vents. In thismode, outside air is pulled insidethe vehicle. The air conditioningsystem runs automatically in thissetting, unless the outsidetemperature is less than 4°C (40°F).

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Air Conditioning

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on and off.An indicator light comes on whenA/C is on.

The A/C does not work when theoutside temperature is below 4°C(40°F). If A/C is pressed theindicator flashes three times andturns off to show that the A/C modeis not available. If the A/C is on andthe outside temperature dropsbelow a temperature which is toocool for air conditioning to beeffective, the A/C indicator turns offto show that the A/C mode hasbeen canceled.



On hot days, open the windowsbriefly to let hot inside air escape.This helps reduce the time it takesfor the interior of the vehicle tocool down.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, sowater might drip under the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and must bere-selected when the engine isturned on again.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostingmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashes

three times and turns off. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.While in recirculation mode thewindows can fog when the weatheris cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

REAR: Press to turn the rearheating and air conditioning on oroff. See Rear Climate ControlSystem on page 8-9 or RearClimate Control System (with RearSeat Audio) on page 8-10.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

R1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rear windowdefogger stays on for about10 minutes, before turning off. Thedefogger also turns off when the

engine is turned off. Do not drive thevehicle until all the windows areclear.

If equipped with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of themirror when the rear window defogbutton is pressed.

{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna ordefogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.

Sensors

The solar sensor in the defrost grillein the middle of the instrumentpanel, monitors the solar heat. Donot cover the solar sensor or thesystem will not work properly.



The interior temperature sensor, onthe instrument panel to the right ofthe steering column, measures thetemperature of the air inside thevehicle.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor behind the frontgrille. This sensor reads the outsideair temperature and helps maintainthe temperature inside the vehicle.Any cover on the front of the vehiclecould cause a false reading in thedisplayed temperature.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the temperature, fanspeed, and air delivery mode. Thesystem may also supply cooler air tothe side of the vehicle facing thesun. The recirculation mode will alsobe used as needed to maintain cooloutlet temperatures.



Rear Climate Control System

1. Fan Control



For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole. The system can also becontrolled with the front controls.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to control therear climate control system. TheREAR text displays when the rearsystem is on.

Sync Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of the rearcontrols. It comes on when any rearcontrol is adjusted.

Fan Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob to ( to turn the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the airflowtemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnto the desired mode to change theairflow direction.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located under thethird row seats.



Rear Climate Control System (with Rear Seat Audio)

1. Fan Control



For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to control therear climate control system. Thesystem also turns on if any of therear controls, except C , arepressed. The display is activatedwhen the rear system is on.

The system can also be turned off,by pressingC until the fan goes off.

Sync Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of the rearcontrols. It comes on when any rearcontrol is adjusted.



D and C (Fan Control): Press thefan up or down buttons to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control: Press + or− to increase or decrease the airtemperature. The temperaturesettings will display in0-12 increments, going from thecoolest (0) to the warmest (12)setting.

N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to manually change thedirection of the airflow. Repeatedlypress the button until the desiredmode appears on the display.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located under thethird row seats.

Air VentsUse the slider switch in the center ofthe outlet, to change the direction ofthe airflow. Use the thumbwheelnear the outlet to control the amountof airflow or to shut off the airflow.

Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. If fogging reoccurs while in ventor bi-level modes with mildtemperature throughout thevehicle, turn on the airconditioner to reduce windshieldfogging.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair and inside air when inrecirculation mode.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-2. To find out what type ofreplacement filter to use, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11-13.

1. Open the glove box.

2. Twist the compartmentretainers (1) and pull outward toremove.

3. Lower the instrument panelcompartment assembly (2)beyond the stops.

4. If needed, unsnap the instrumentpanel compartment assembly (2)from the instrument panel. Whenreinstalling, be sure theinstrument panel compartmentdampener arm is alignedproperly to the dampener gearassembly.

5. Squeeze the housing cover (1)tabs to remove.

6. Remove the old air filter from thepassenger compartment air filterhousing (2).

7. Install the new air filter.

8. Replace the housing cover.

9. If removed, reinstall theinstrument panel compartmentassembly.

10. Reinstall the compartmentretainers.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-28

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Driver Assistance SystemsForward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-34Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-42Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-43California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-43Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45


9-2 Driving and Operating

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment sectionand the infotainment manual formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-14.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.



If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Variable Effort Steering

Some vehicles have a steeringsystem that varies the amount ofeffort required to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slower speeds tomake the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park. Atfaster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-like feelto the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steerthan normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problem withthe system. You will still have powersteering, but steering will be stifferthan normal at slow speeds. Seeyour dealer for service.

Hydraulic Power Steering

This vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10-18.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops, or thereis a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

{ Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionfor more than 15 seconds,

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

damage may occur to the powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable, steady

speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.



. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.



. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-37.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.



Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.



Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

Traction Control should be turnedon. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-26.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads are

clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to get

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

inside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.


(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-21.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restart

the vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-28.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-72.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Example Label

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The tire and loading

information label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10-37 and Tire Pressureon page 10-44.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axle. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.



“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing on page 9-49for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certification/Tire label is attached to thecenter pillar (B-pillar).

The label shows the grossweight capacity of your vehicle.This is called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The



GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel,and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

{ Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

{ Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.



In order to shift out of P (Park), theignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedalmust be applied.

{ Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

( (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-18.

This position locks the ignition,transmission, and the steeringwheel when the key Is removedfrom the ignition. The key can beremoved in LOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoes not work, then the vehicleneeds service.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-27.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.



If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This isthe position in which you canoperate the electrical accessories oritems plugged into the accessorypower outlets. This position unlocksthe ignition and steering wheel. Usethis position if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

R (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition. If you leave the key in theACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition with the engine off, the

battery could be drained. You maynot be able to start the vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

/ (START): This is the positionthat starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key. Theignition switch will return to ON/RUNfor driving.

Key Lock Release

The vehicle has an electronic keylock release system. This system isto prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is in P (Park).

The key lock release will not work ifthe battery is charged less than9-volts, or uncharged. Try chargingor jump starting the battery. SeeJump Starting on page 10-68

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

{ Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

{ Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-53.



{ Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionwhile starting the vehicle, damagemay occur to the hydraulic powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Donot race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key is

turned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. Toprevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch tothe ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate the



engine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at least fourhours before starting. Some modelsmay have an internal thermostat inthe cord which will prevent enginecoolant heater operation attemperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The bundled cordis located on the driver side ofthe engine compartment,between the engine air cleanerand the windshield washer fluid

reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theignition key is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the windows and sunroofwill work up to 10 minutes or until adoor is opened.

The radio continues to work for10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

For an additional 10 minutes ofoperation, close all the doors andturn the key to ON/RUN and thenback to LOCK/OFF.



All these features will work when thekey is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY positions.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down and

set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-27 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the shiftlever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-19. If you are towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-46.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move the shift leveraway from P (Park) without firstpushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inP (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.



If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThe vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released, and

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10-68 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Place the ignition in ON/RUN.

2. Apply the brake pedal.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see your dealer.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-19and Engine Exhaust on page 9-21.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-46.



AutomaticTransmission

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-19 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9-46.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. With the ignition in ON/RUN, fully apply the regular brake,

then press the button on the back ofthe shift lever before shifting fromP (Park). If you cannot shift out ofP (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever, then push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9-20.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

{ Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.



To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

{ Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

{ Caution

If the vehicle accelerates slowly,or does not shift gears, thetransmission could be damaged.Have the vehicle servicedright away.

If the vehicle is stopped on a hill,with your foot off the brake pedal,the vehicle may roll. This is normaland is due to the torque converterdesigned to improve fuel economyand performance. Use the brake tohold the vehicle on a hill. Do not usethe accelerator pedal.

L (Low): This position gives youaccess to gear ranges. Thisprovides more engine braking butlower fuel economy than D (Drive).You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud. SeeManual Mode on page 9-24.



Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument cluster. When using theERS mode a number will displaynext to the L, indicating the currentgear that has been selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus button onthe shift lever, to increase ordecrease the gear rangeavailable.

When you shift from D (Drive) toL (Low), the transmission will shift toa pre-determined lower gear range.The highest gear available for thispre-determined range is displayednext to the L in the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-23 for more information. Thenumber displayed in the DIC is thehighest gear that the transmissionwill be allowed to operate in. Thismeans that all gears below thatnumber are available. For example,when 4 (Fourth) is shown next to theL, 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gearsare automatically shifted by thevehicle. The transmission will notshift into 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus)button is used or you shift back intoD (Drive).

While in L (Low), the transmissionwill prevent shifting to a lower gearrange if the engine speed is toohigh. You have a brief period of timeto slow the vehicle. If vehicle speedis not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear range shiftwill not be completed. You mustfurther slow the vehicle, then pressthe − (Minus) button to the desiredlower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade Braking isnot available when the ERS isactive. It is available in D (Drive) forboth normal and Tow/Haul mode.While using the ERS, cruise controland the Tow/Haul mode can beused. See Tow/Haul Mode following.

Tow/Haul Mode_ (Tow/Haul): If equipped withTow/Haul mode, the button is on thecenter stack under the climatecontrols.



Push the button to activate thesystem. Push it again to deactivatethe system. You can use this featureto assist when towing or hauling aheavy load.

When Tow/Haul is activated, theTow/Haul symbol will come on in theinstrument cluster. See “Tow/HaulMode” under Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-46.

Automatic Engine GradeBraking

Automatic Engine Grade Brakingassists when driving on a downhillgrade. It maintains vehicle speed byautomatically implementing a shiftschedule that uses the engine andthe transmission to slow the vehicle.

The system will automaticallycommand downshifts to reducevehicle speed, until the brake pedalis no longer being pressed.

While in the Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) mode, grade brakingis deactivated, allowing the driver toselect a range and limiting thehighest gear available. Gradebraking is available for normaldriving and in Tow/Haul mode.

See Automatic Transmission onpage 9-22.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature transferengine power, as required, to allfour wheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and reduces AWDperformance to protect the system.To restore full AWD operation andprevent excessive wear on thesystem, replace the compact sparewith a full-size tire as soon aspossible. See Compact Spare Tireon page 10-67.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-19.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-18.

{ Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will be on anda chime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9-46.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This featureautomatically uses the stabilitysystem hydraulic brake controlmodule to supplement the powerbrake system under conditionswhere the driver has quickly andforcefully applied the brake pedal inan attempt to quickly stop or slowdown the vehicle. The stabilitysystem hydraulic brake controlmodule increases brake pressure ateach corner of the vehicle until theABS activates. Minor brake pedalpulsation or pedal movement duringthis time is normal and the drivershould continue to apply the brakepedal as the driving situationdictates. The brake assist featurewill automatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has an HSA feature,which may be useful when thevehicle is stopped on a grade. Thisfeature is designed to prevent thevehicle from rolling, either forward orrearward, during vehicle drive off.After the driver completely stopsand holds the vehicle in a completestandstill on a grade, HSA will beautomatically activated. During thetransition period between when thedriver releases the brake pedal andstarts to accelerate to drive off on agrade, HSA holds the brakingpressure for a maximum oftwo seconds to ensure that there isno rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. It will notactivate if the vehicle is in a drivegear and facing downhill, or if thevehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel slipand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of the

vehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9-9 and “Turning the SystemsOff and On” later in this section.



The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:. Flash when TCS is limiting

wheel spin.. Flash when StabiliTrak is

activated.. Turn on and stay on when either

system is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the center stack.

{ Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off TCS and StabiliTrak,press and release the 4 button. Theappropriate message displays in theDIC. To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the 4button. The appropriate messagedisplays in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5-38.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe 4 button is pressed, the systemwill not turn off until the wheels stopspinning.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control is disengaged.

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not use thecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If the Traction Control System (TCS)or StabiliTrak system begins to limitwheel spin while cruise control isbeing used, the cruise control willdisengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-28. If a collision alert occurswhen cruise control is activated,cruise control is disengaged. SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-32. When roadconditions allow you to safely use itagain, the cruise control can beturned on.

T (On/Off): Press to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicatorlight on the button comes on whenthe cruise control is on.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.If cruise control is already active,use to increase vehicle speed.

SET–: Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.



The cruise control light on theinstrument cluster comes on afterthe cruise control has been set tothe desired speed.

1. PressI to turn the cruisecontrol system on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press and release the SET–button on the steering wheel.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, press the +RESbutton on the steering wheel. Thevehicle returns to the previously setspeed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press the+RES button briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thelower speed desired is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, press the SET–button briefly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing the SET– button will resultin cruise control set to the currentvehicle speed.



Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruise controlis disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press the [ button.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressT on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingT or if the ignition is turned off.

Driver AssistanceSystems

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. FCAprovides a red flashing visual alertand beeps when approaching avehicle directly ahead too quickly.FCA also provides a visual alert iffollowing another vehicle much tooclosely.

The forward-looking FCA camerasensor is on the windshield aheadof the rearview mirror. FCA detectsvehicles within a distance ofapproximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 40 km/h(25 mph).

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 9-3.



Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

The green vehicle ahead indicatorwill appear when a vehicle isdetected ahead. Whenever thisindicator does not appear, FCA willnot respond. The indicator maydisappear on curves, highway exitramps, or hills, or due to poorvisibility. The FCA system will notdetect another vehicle ahead until itis completely in the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Tailgating Alert

The green vehicle ahead indicatorwill turn amber if following anothervehicle much too closely.

Collision Alert

Without HUD

With HUD

When your vehicle approachesanother vehicle too rapidly, this redFCA display will flash and eightbeeps will sound from the front.When this occurs, the brake systemprepares for driver braking to occurmore rapidly. Continue to apply thebrake pedal as the driving situationdictates.



Selecting the Alert Timing

Press the collision alert button,[,on the center stack to set the alerttiming to far, medium, near, or off.The first button press shows thecurrent control setting on the DIC.Additional button presses willchange this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect both the CollisionAlert and the Tailgating Alertfeatures. The timing of both alertswill vary based on vehicle speed.The faster the vehicle speed, thefurther away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alerttiming. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts to turning vehicles, vehicles inother lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Other Messages

There are messages that mayappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) in the instrumentcluster to provide information aboutFCA. See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5-36.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, clean the outsideof the windshield area in front of thecamera sensor before consideringtaking the vehicle in for service.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) systemassists the driver with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).The sensors on the rear bumper areused to detect objects up to2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, andat least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground

and below liftgate level. Detectiondistances may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.

{ Warning

The URPA system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with URPA, alwayscheck the area around the vehicleand check all mirrors beforebacking.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single beep soundsto indicate the system is working.



An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping iscontinuous for five seconds.

Turning the System On and Off

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Park Assist” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-23 for more information.

Turn off URPA when towing a trailer.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10-75.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theobject is removed, URPA willreturn to normal operation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the Side Blind ZoneAlert system is a lane-changing aidthat assists drivers with avoidingcrashes that occur with vehicles inthe side blind zone (or spot) areas.The SBZA warning display will lightup in the corresponding outside sidemirror and will flash if the turn signalis on.



{ Warning

SBZA does not alert the driver tovehicles rapidly approachingoutside of the side blind zones,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals. It may not providealerts when changing lanes underall driving conditions. Failure touse proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Beforemaking a lane change, alwayscheck mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turnsignals.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. Thiszone starts at approximately themiddle of the vehicle and goes back5 m (16 ft).


The SBZA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a vehicle in the next lane

over that is in the side blind zone.This indicates it may be unsafe tochange lanes. Before making a lanechange, check the SBZA display,check mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turn signals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror SBZA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is moving forward, the left-or right-side mirror display will lightup if a vehicle is detected in thatblind zone. If the turn signal isactivated in the same direction of adetected vehicle, this display willflash as an extra warning not tochange lanes.



SBZA can be disabled through theDriver Information Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5-23. If SBZA is disabled bythe driver, the SBZA mirror displayswill not light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

SBZA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly orwhen towing a trailer. Keep in mindthe SBZA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use extracaution while changing lanes whentowing a trailer. SBZA may alert youto objects attached to the vehicle,such as a trailer, bicycle, or objectextending out to either side of thevehicle. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not always alert thedriver to vehicles in the side blindzone, especially in wet conditions.The system does not need to be

serviced. The system may light updue to guardrails, signs, trees,shrubs, and other non-movingobjects. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not operate when theSBZA sensors in the left or rightcorners of the rear bumper arecovered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. Forcleaning instructions, see "Washingthe Vehicle" under Exterior Care onpage 10-75. If the DIC still displaysthe SIDE DETECTION SYSTEMPORARILY OFF message aftercleaning both sides of the vehicletoward the rear corners of thevehicle, see your dealer.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen vehicles are in the blind zoneand the system is clean, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.

When SBZA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the Side Blind Zone Alert ONoption will not be available on theDIC menu.

FCC Information


Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have an RVCsystem. Read this entire sectionbefore using it.

{ Warning

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectlocated outside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different from

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

actual distances. Do not back thevehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be crosstraffic. Failure to use proper carebefore backing may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Always check behind and aroundthe vehicle before backing.

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe driver shifts the vehicle intoR (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on theinfotainment screen. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), the screenwill go back to the last screen thathad been displayed, after a delay.

The RVC display remains on aftershifting out of R (Reverse) forapproximately 10 seconds. Return tothe previous screen sooner byperforming one of the following:. Press a hard key on the

infotainment system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Symbols and Guidelines

The RVC system may have afeature that lets the driver viewcaution symbols on the RVC screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) system must not bedisabled to use these symbols. SeeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-34.

The caution symbols appear whenan object has been detected by theURPA system. The symbol maycover the object when viewing theRVC screen.

The RVC system may have aguideline overlay that can help thedriver align the vehicle whenbacking into a parking spot.

To turn the symbols and guidelineson or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press Settings on the Homescreen of the infotainmentsystem.

3. Select Display Settings.

4. Select Rear Camera. The RearCamera screen displays.

5. Select Symbols or Guidelines.When a checkmark appears nextto the item, it is on.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

On vehicles with RCTA, a redwarning triangle with an arrow mayalso display on the RVC screen towarn of traffic coming from eitherdirection, behind the vehicle. Whenan object is detected, three beepssound on the left or right side,depending on the direction of the



detected vehicle. This systemdetects objects coming from up to20 m (65 ft) from the left or right sidebehind the vehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend outfrom the back of your vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed.

The RCTA system can be disabledthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-23.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited and does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper. The areadisplayed can vary depending onvehicle orientation or road

conditions. Displayed images maybe farther or closer than theyappear.

The following illustrations show thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by the camera.

1. View displayed by the camera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or display aclear image if:. It is dark.. The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.



. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

. There are extreme temperaturechanges.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide awarning if the vehicle is crossing alane without using a turn signal inthe lane departure direction. LDWuses a camera sensor to detect thelane markings. It only operates atspeeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater.

When the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking, the LDWindicator will flash and three beepswill be sounded from the left or right

side, depending on the lanedeparture direction. LDW will notwarn if the turn signal is on in thedeparture direction, or if a sharpmaneuver is made.

{ Warning

The LDW system is an aid to helpthe vehicle stay in the drivinglane. It does not steer the vehicle.The LDW system may not:

. Provide enough time to avoida crash.

. Detect lane markings underbad weather conditions or ifthe windshield is dirty.

. Detect lane markings and willnot detect road edges.

. Warn that the vehicle iscrossing a lane marking if thesystem does not detect thelane marking.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you whendeparting the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarker. Even with LDW, alwayskeep your attention on the roadand maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield clean and do not useLDW in bad weather conditions.


The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press @ onthe center stack, forward of the shiftlever. The control indicator will lightwhen LDW is on.



When the vehicle is started, theLDW indicator on the instrumentcluster will come on briefly.

If LDW is on, the LDW indicator willappear green if the system detectsa left or right lane marking while thevehicle is traveling at 56 km/h (35mph) or greater. If the vehiclecrosses a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thelane departure direction, thisindicator will change to amber andflash. In addition, three beeps willbe sounded from the left or rightside, depending on the lanedeparture direction.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

If the LDW symbol does not appearwhen the system is on and thevehicle is traveling at least 56 km/h(35 mph):. The lane markings on the road

may not be seen.. The camera sensor may be

blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.. The windshield may be

damaged.. The weather may be limiting

visibility.

This is normal operation; the vehicledoes not need service. Clean thewindshield.

Lane markings may not be detectedon curves, highway exit ramps,or hills; or due to poor visibility.

If the LDW camera system does notseem to operate properly, cleaningthe outside of the windshield in frontof the camera sensor may correctthe issue.

{ Warning

LDW does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects the lane markings. LDWmay not detect the lane markingsif the camera sensor is blockedby dirt, snow, or ice, or if thewindshield is damaged. It mayalso not detect a lane on windingor hilly roads, or in conditions thatcan limit visibility such as fog,rain, or snow, or if the headlampsor windshield are not cleaned orin proper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair.

LDW warnings may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,or other road imperfections. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S., to help keep theengine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, werecommend using TOP TIERDetergent Gasolines. Seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasolines.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noisemay be heard. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a higher octane rating,the engine needs service.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. Driving orstarting could be affected if theincorrect fuel is used. Drive thevehicle with the engine running untilthe fuel is a half tank or less, thenrefuel with the current seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,

then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 and other fuelscontaining more than 15% ethanolmust be used only in FlexFuelvehicles.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, see your dealer for service.



Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See “ProhibitedFuels" in Recommended Fuel onpage 9-42.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and the

vehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-16. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel notrecommended. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-42.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, partnumber 88861013, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp. Fuel System Treatment PLUSis the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

wait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver side of thevehicle. To open the fuel door, pushand release the rearward centeredge of the door.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-75.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-16.



{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

{ Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap might not fit properly,might cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-16.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-72.For towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle such as a motorhome, see Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10-72.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state

and local laws that applyspecifically to trailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500mi), to preventdamage to the engine, axle orother parts.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 mi) trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)but M (Manual Mode) isrecommended. See ManualMode on page 9-24. Use a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


. Also adjust the ClimateControl system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-21.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.



Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move your hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

{ Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument cluster flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer



lamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument cluster flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

The Tow/Haul Mode may be used ifthe transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-24.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than at

normal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10-16.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.



3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10-16.

Trailer TowingThree important considerationshave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.



Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Front-Wheel Drive 907 kg (2,000 lb) 3 402 kg (7,500 lb)

Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 2 359 kg (5,200 lb) 4 649 kg (10,250 lb)

All-Wheel Drive 907 kg (2,000 lb) 3 493 kg (7,700 lb)

All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 2 359 kg (5,200 lb) 4 740 kg (10,450 lb)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.

If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.



If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (1) shouldweigh 10-15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (2).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicle doesnot exceed any of its ratings —GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, MaximumTrailer Rating or Tongue Weight.The only way to be sure it is notexceeding any of these ratings is toweigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-10 for moreinformation. Do not go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by, and rough roadsare a few reasons why the righthitch is needed.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,then be sure to seal the holeswhen the hitch is removed. If theholes are not sealed, dirt, water,and deadly carbon monoxide(CO) from the exhaust may getinto the vehicle. See EngineExhaust on page 9-21.



Weight-Distributing Hitches andWeight Carrying Hitches

1. Body-to-Ground Distance

2. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the hitch must be adjusted sothat the distance (1) remains thesame both before and after couplingthe trailer to the tow vehicle.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not try to tap into thevehicle's hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems willnot work well, or at all.

Trailer Wiring Harness

Basic Trailer Wiring

The trailer wiring harness, with aseven-pin connector, is located atthe rear of the vehicle and is tied tothe vehicle's frame. The harnessconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. Black: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red/Black: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*



*The fuse for this circuit is installedin the underhood electrical center,but the wires are not connected.They should be connected by yourdealer or a qualified service center.

If the back-up lamp circuit is notfunctional, contact your dealer.

If a remote (non-vehicle) battery isbeing charged, press the Tow/Haulmode switch located on the centerconsole near the climate controls.This will boost the vehicle systemvoltage and properly charge thebattery. If the trailer is too light forTow/Haul mode, turn on theheadlamps (non-HID only) as asecond way to boost the vehiclesystem and charge the battery.

Electric Trailer Brake ControlWiring Provisions

These wiring provisions for anelectric trailer brake controller areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theinstrument panel contains blunt cutwires above the parking brakeassembly for the electric trailerbrake controller. The harnesscontains the following wires:. Red/Black: Power Supply. White: Brake Switch Signal. Gray: Illumination. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal. Black: Ground

The electric trailer brake controllershould be installed by your dealer ora qualified service center.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-34 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-34.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-2

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-10Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-16

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-18Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-23Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Windshield Replacement . . . 10-25

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-26Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Electrical SystemHigh Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Electrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-39Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50


10-2 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-67

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-72Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and


Vehicle Care 10-3

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-34.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-34.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-14.

{ Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.


10-4 Vehicle Care

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handlewith this symbol on it. It is underthe instrument panel on thedriver side of the vehicle. 2. At the front of the vehicle, pull

up on the center of the hood,and push the secondary hoodrelease to the right.

3. After you have partially lifted thehood, gas struts willautomatically take over to lift andhold the hood in the fully openposition.

Before closing the hood, be sure allfiller caps are on properly.

Pull the hood down to close. Lowerthe hood until the lifting pressure ofthe strut is reduced. Then allow thehood to fall and latch into placeunder its own weight. Check tomake sure the hood is closed. If thehood does not fully latch, gentlypush the hood down at the front andcenter of the hood until it iscompletely latched.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview


10-6 Vehicle Care

1. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-68.

2. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-28.

3. Radiator Pressure Cap (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

4. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap.See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

5. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-68.

6. Power Steering Reservoir andCap (Under Engine Cover). SeePower Steering Fluid onpage 10-18.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10-7.

8. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10-7.

9. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

10. Engine Cover on page 10-6.

11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brakes onpage 10-20.

12. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-19.

13. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-10.

Engine Cover

1. Oil Fill Cap

2. Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).

2. Raise the engine cover (2) torelease it from the retainers.

3. Lift and remove the enginecover.

4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstallengine cover.


Vehicle Care 10-7

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-9.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.


10-8 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

{ Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used.An oil of this viscosity grade willprovide easier cold starting for theengine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correct


Vehicle Care 10-9

specification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or rags

containing used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.


10-10 Vehicle Care

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

3. Press and hold V until “100%” isdisplayed. Three chimes soundand the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message goes off.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-2, and be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

{ Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

The transmission fluid will not reachthe end of the dipstick unless thetransmission is at operatingtemperature. If you need to checkthe transmission fluid level, pleasetake the vehicle to your dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mile)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11-2. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter (away


Vehicle Care 10-11

from vehicle) to release loose dustand dirt. If the filter remains coveredwith dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Air Duct Clamp

2. Electrical Connector

3. Screws

1. Loosen the air duct clamp (1).

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2).

3. Remove the screws (3) and liftthe cover assembly.

4. Inspect or replace the aircleaner/filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstallthe housing cover and reconnectthe electrical connector to thesensor.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

{ Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1. Radiator Pressure Cap (UnderSight Shield)

2. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank

3. Engine Cooling Fans (Outof View)


10-12 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

{ Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11-2 and RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-12.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-16.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

{ Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

mixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the FULL COLD mark orthe FULL COLD ISO symbol mark,add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant at the coolant recovery tank,but be sure the cooling system iscool before this is done. See EngineOverheating on page 10-16.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theFULL COLD mark or the FULLCOLD ISO symbol mark on therecovery tank.


10-14 Vehicle Care

When the engine is hot, the levelcould be higher than the FULLCOLD mark or the FULL COLD ISOsymbol mark. If the coolant is belowthe FULL COLD mark or the FULLCOLD ISO symbol mark when theengine is hot, there could be a leakin the cooling system.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer forservice.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

If recovery tank is empty, check thecoolant level in the radiator beforeadding coolant to the recovery tankor take the vehicle to the dealer forservice. See “How to Add Coolant tothe Radiator” later in this section.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done. Then check therecovery tank and add coolant ifneeded.


Vehicle Care 10-15

1. Detach the fasteners and lift offthe panel that covers theradiator cap.

2. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turn thepressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about onefull turn.

If a hiss is heard, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left in thesystem.

3. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

4. Fill the radiator to the base ofthe filler neck with the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture.

5. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe FULL COLD mark or to theFULL COLD ISO symbol mark.


10-16 Vehicle Care

6. Reinstall the cap on the coolantrecovery tank but leave theradiator pressure cap off.

7. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hosefeels warm. Any time during thisprocedure, watch out for theengine cooling fans.

8. If the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck is low, addmore of the proper DEX-COOLcoolant mixture through the fillerneck until the level is back up tothe base of the filler neck.

9. Replace the pressure cap tightly.At any time during thisprocedure if coolant begins toflow out of the filler neck,reinstall the pressure cap.

{ Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on theinstrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gaugeon page 5-12.

The vehicle may also display anENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE and ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINEmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Engine CoolingSystem Messages on page 5-34.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parked ona level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10-18 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.


Vehicle Care 10-17

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned.Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10-18 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in frontof you. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.


10-18 Vehicle Care

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”next in this section.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode letsthe vehicle be driven to a safe placein an emergency situation. If anoverheated engine condition exists,an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, there is a significant lossin power and engine performance.The temperature gauge indicates anoverheat condition exists. Drivingextended distances and/or towing atrailer in the overheat protectionmode should be avoided.

{ Caution

After driving in the overheatedengine protection operatingmode, the engine oil will beseverely degraded. Any repairsperformed before the engine iscool may cause engine damage.Allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. Repair thecause of coolant loss, change theoil, and reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 10-7.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir isunder the engine cover on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in thesystem or you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove the engine cover. SeeEngine Cover on page 10-6.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.


Vehicle Care 10-19

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should besomewhere between the MAX andMIN line on the dipstick in roomtemperature. If the fluid is on orbelow the MIN line, add fluid closeto the MAX line.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

{ Caution

Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always use

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When adding windshield washerfluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If the vehicle will be operatingin an area where the temperaturemay fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

When the windshield washer fluidreservoir is low, a WASHER FLUIDLOW ADD FLUID message will bedisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Washer FluidMessages on page 5-41.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for reservoir location.

{ Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

(Continued)


10-20 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in the

proper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to get


Vehicle Care 10-21

new, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-18.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.


10-22 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

{ Caution

. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system partsso badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-68 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.


Vehicle Care 10-23

All-Wheel DriveTransfer case fluid does not requirechecking unless there is a fluid leakor unusual noise. If required, havethe transfer case serviced by yourdealer.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle beginsto move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckIf equipped with a key type ignition,while parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove foot

pressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade Replacement

Front Wiper Blade

Windshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For the proper typeand size, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-13.

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Squeeze the tabs on each sideof the wiper blade assembly andslide the assembly off the end ofthe wiper arm.


Vehicle Care 10-25

3. Install the new blade onto thearm connector and make surethe tabs are fully set in thelocked position.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot allow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

4. Repeat the steps for the otherblade.

Rear Wiper Blade

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass.

The rear wiper blade will not lockin a vertical position so careshould be used when pulling itaway from the vehicle.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely in the wiper arm hookuntil the release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe glass.

Windshield ReplacementThe vehicle is equipped with anacoustic windshield. If you everhave to have the windshieldreplaced be sure to get an acousticwindshield so you will continue tohave the benefits an acousticwindshield can provide.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-27.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two push pinsholding each of the license platelamps to the liftgate trim byunscrewing them.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp forward through the liftgatetrim opening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstallthe license plate lamp.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

License Plate Lamp 194LL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices andWiring

{ Warning

Exposure to high voltage cancause shock, burns, and evendeath. The high voltagecomponents in the vehicle canonly be serviced by technicianswith special training.

High voltage components areidentified by labels. Do notremove, open, take apart,or modify these components.High voltage cable or wiring hasorange covering. Do not probe,tamper with, cut, or modify highvoltage cable or wiring.

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuits bya combination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is in theengine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.

{ Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end ofthe fuse between your thumb andindex finger and pull straight out.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Acadia with HID Lighting The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

A/C CLTCH Air ConditioningClutch

ABS MTR Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)Motor

AFS Adaptive ForwardLighting System

AIRBAG Airbag System

AUX POWER Auxiliary Power

AUXVAC PUMP

AuxiliaryVacuum Pump

AWD All-Wheel-DriveSystem

BATT 1 Battery 1

BATT 2 Battery 2

BATT 3 Battery 3

CIGARLIGHTER

Cigarette Lighter


10-30 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

ECM 1 Engine ControlModule 1

EMISSION 1 Emission 1


EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

* Trailer Brakes/Headlamp Washer(China)

FSCM Fuel SystemControl Module

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps (GMC)

HORN Horn

HTD MIR Heated OutsideRearview Mirror

HUMIDITY/MAF

Humidity Sensor/MAF Sensor

Fuses Usage

HVAC BLWR Heating,Ventilation, and AirConditioningBlower

LT HI BEAM Left High-BeamHeadlamp

LT LO BEAM Left Low-BeamHeadlamp

LT PRK Left Parking Lamp

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal

ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils

PCM IGN Powertrain ControlModule Ignition

PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate

PWROUTLET

Power Outlet

RR APO Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

RR DEFOG Rear Defogger

Fuses Usage

RR HVAC Rear ClimateControl System

RT HI BEAM Right High-BeamHeadlamp

RT LO BEAM Right Low-BeamHeadlamp

RT PRK RightParking Lamp

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal

RVC SNSR Regulated VoltageControl Sensor

S/ROOF/SUNSHADE

Sunroof

SERVICE Service Repair

SPARE Spare

STOPLAMPS(CHINAONLY)

Stoplamps(China Only)

STRTR Starter


Vehicle Care 10-31

Fuses Usage

TCM TransmissionControl Module

TRANS Transmission

TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back-upLamps

TRLR BRK Trailer Brake

TRLRPRK LAMP

Trailer ParkingLamps

TRLR PWR Trailer Power

WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/Washer

Relays Usage

A/CCMPRSRCLTCH

Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

AUXVAC PUMP


CRNK Switched Power

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

Relays Usage

FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps (GMC)

HI BEAM High-BeamHeadlamps

HID/LO BEAM

High IntensityDischarge (HID)Low-BeamHeadlamps

HORN Horn

IGN Ignition Main

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

PRK LAMP Parking Lamp

PWR/TRN Powertrain

RR DEFOG Rear WindowDefogger

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

Relays Usage

STOPLAMPS(CHINAONLY)

Stop Lamps(China Only)

TRLRBCK/UP


WPR Windshield Wiper

WPR HI Windshield WiperHigh Speed


10-32 Vehicle Care

Acadia with Halogen Lighting The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

A/C CLTCH Air ConditioningClutch

ABS MTR Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)Motor

AIRBAG Airbag System

AUX POWER Auxiliary Power

AUXVAC PUMP


AWD All-Wheel-DriveSystem

BATT 1 Battery 1

BATT 2 Battery 2

BATT 3 Battery 3

CIGARLIGHTER

Cigarette Lighter

ECM 1 Engine ControlModule 1


Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses Usage



EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

RT DRL Right DaytimeRunning Lamp

FSCM Fuel SystemControl Module

HORN Horn

HTD MIR Heated OutsideRearview Mirror

HUMIDITY/MAF

Humidity Sensor/MAF Sensor

HVAC BLWR Heating,Ventilation, and AirConditioningBlower

LT HI BEAM Left High-BeamHeadlamp

Fuses Usage

LT DRL Left DaytimeRunning Lamp

LT PRK Left Parking Lamp

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal

ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils

PCM IGN Powertrain ControlModule Ignition

PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate

PWROUTLET

Power Outlet

RR APO Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

RR DEFOG Rear Defogger

RR HVAC Rear ClimateControl System

RT HI BEAM Right Hi-BeamHeadlamp

Fuses Usage

RT PRK RightParking Lamp

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal

RVC SNSR Regulated VoltageControl Sensor

S/ROOF/SUNSHADE

Sunroof

SERVICE Service Repair

SPARE Spare

FOG LAMPS Fog Lamps

STRTR Starter

TCM TransmissionControl Module

TRANS Transmission

TRLRBCK/UP


TRLR BRK Trailer Brake

TRLRPRK LAMP

Trailer ParkingLamps


10-34 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

TRLR PWR Trailer Power

WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/Washer

Relays Usage

A/CCMPRSRCLTCH

Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

AUXVAC PUMP


CRNK Switched Power

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

RT DRL Right DaytimeRunning Lamp

HI BEAM High-BeamHeadlamps

LT DRL Left DaytimeRunning Lamp

HORN Horn

Relays Usage

IGN Ignition Main

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

PRK LAMP Parking Lamp

PWR/TRN Powertrain

RR DEFOG Rear WindowDefogger

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

FOG LAMPS Fog Lamps

TRLRBCK/UP


WPR Windshield Wiper

WPR HI Windshield WiperHigh Speed

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block isunder the instrument panel on thepassenger side of the vehicle. Pulldown on the cover to access thefuse block.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Fuse Side

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

# GMC NON HID =Lo Beam

) GMC NON HID =High Shutter

) ) Chevy = FogLamps

) ) ) Buick China =Rear Fog Lamp

AIRBAG Airbag

AMP Amplifier

BCKUP/STOP

Back-up Lamp/Stoplamp

BCM Body ControlModule

CNSTRVENT

Canister Vent

CTSY Courtesy Lamps

DR LCK Door Locks

Fuses Usage

DRL/LO BEAM

Daytime RunningLamps Relay/LowBeam HeadlampsRelay

DSPLY Display

FRT WSW Front WindshieldWasher

HTD/COOL SEAT

Heated/CoolingSeats

HVAC Heating,Ventilation, and AirConditioning

INADV PWRINT LAMPS

Inadvertent Power/Interior Light PipeLamps

INFOTMNT/MSM

Infotainment/Memory SeatModule

LT TRN SIG Driver Side TurnSignal

OBSDET/URS

Rear Park Assist/Side Blind ZoneAlert/Forward


10-36 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

Collision Alert/Universal RemoteSystem

PDM Power Mirrors,Liftgate Release

PWR MODE Power Mode

PWR MIR Power Mirrors

RDO Radio

REAR WPR Rear Wiper

RT TRN SIG Passenger SideTurn Signal

STR WHLILLUM

Steering WheelIllumination

USB CHRG USB Charging

Relay Side

Relays Usage

LT/PWR/SEAT

Driver Side PowerSeat Relay

RT/PWR/SEAT

Passenger SidePower Seat Relay

PWR/WNDW Power WindowsRelay

PWR/COLUMN

Power SteeringColumn Relay

L/GATE Liftgate Relay

LCK Power Lock Relay

REAR/WSW Rear WindowWasher Relay

UNLCK Power UnlockRelay

DRL/LO BEAM

Daytime RunningLamps Relay/Low-BeamHeadlamps Relay

LT/UNLCK Driver Side UnlockRelay


Vehicle Care 10-37

Relays Usage

DRL/LO BEAM

Daytime RunningLamps Relay (IfEquipped)

HI SHUTTER Hi Shutter (GMCwith HalogenLighting)

FRT/WSW Front WindshieldWasher Relay

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)


10-38 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10-38.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-52.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.


Vehicle Care 10-39

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will decreaseperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving in coldtemperatures or on snow or icecovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires on page 10-38.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first two


10-40 Vehicle Care

digits represent the week (01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on three

performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10-54.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10-67 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10-57.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.


Vehicle Care 10-41

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

(6) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.


10-42 Vehicle Care

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are

automatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-44.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.


Vehicle Care 10-43

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-44 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread

of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-51.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-54.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.


Vehicle Care 10-45

{ Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire on page 10-67.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or

tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to


Vehicle Care 10-47

ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-47.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly, if the vehiclehas one. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in the tiresand transmits the tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in thevehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation and

displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-23 and TireMessages on page 5-39.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-44.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-50, Tire Rotation onpage 10-50 and Tires onpage 10-37.


10-48 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning messagedisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on at

each ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire,if your vehicle has one. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-52.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.


Vehicle Care 10-49

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. The TPMS sensormatching process should also beperformed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go offat the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter's Q and Kbuttons at the same time forapproximately five seconds. Thehorn sounds twice to signal thereceiver is in relearn mode andTIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheel

alignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-51and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-56.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.


Vehicle Care 10-51

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-44and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-47.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could come

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

off and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

Check that the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is storedproperly. Push, pull, and then tryto rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, tighten the cable. SeeTire Changing on page 10-59.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10-50 and TireRotation on page 10-50.


10-52 Vehicle Care

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacturer date is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01–52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight to

slow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-39.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation and


Vehicle Care 10-53

maintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-50.However, if it is necessary toreplace only one axle set ofworn tires, place the new tireson the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-46.


10-54 Vehicle Care

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-52 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-2.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with


Vehicle Care 10-55

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of


10-56 Vehicle Care

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other road

surface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicle

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-57

Caution (Continued)

ground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10-37. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.


10-58 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only for

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-3.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1).


Vehicle Care 10-59

1. Wheel Block

2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing Tools

The tools needed to remove thespare tire are located in the storagecompartment on the driver side, atthe rear of the vehicle.

1. Tool Bag

2. Wing Bolt

3. Jack

1. Open the jack storagecompartment by pulling on thelatch tab, located toward the rearof the vehicle, and pulling thecover off.

2. Remove the wing bolt (2) byturning it counterclockwise.

3. Push the jack (3) up out of theholding bracket and remove thetool bag (1).

4. Turn the jack on its side, with thebottom facing toward you.

5. Pull the jack straight out, bottomfirst.

1. Jack

2. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,One-Piece Similar)

The tools you will be using includethe jack (1) and wrench (2).


10-60 Vehicle Care

Removing the Spare Tire

The compact spare tire is locatedunder the vehicle, in front of the rearbumper. See Compact Spare Tireon page 10-67 for more information.

1. Rear Convenience Center

2. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,One-Piece Similar)

3. Carpet Cutout

4. Hoist Shaft

5. Compact Spare Tire

6. Retainer

1. Open the storage compartmentdoor of the conveniencecenter (1) that is nearest theliftgate.

2. Open the carpet cutout (3) thatis located through the hole of thestorage compartment.

3. Attach the wrench (2) into thehoist shaft (4).

4. Turn the wrench (2)counterclockwise to lower thespare tire (5) to the ground.Continue turning the wrench untilthe spare tire can be pulled outfrom under the vehicle.

5. Tilt the retainer and slip itthrough the wheel opening toremove the spare tire from thecable.

6. Turn the wrench clockwise toraise the cable back up afterremoving the spare tire.

Do not store a full-size or a flatroad tire under the vehicle. See“Storing the Spare Tire” and“Storing the Flat Tire” later in thissection.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-57 for moreinformation.


Vehicle Care 10-61

2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,loosen the plastic nut caps withthe wheel wrench. They will notcome off. Then, using the flatend of the wheel wrench, pryalong the edge of the cover untilit comes off. Be careful; theedges may be sharp. Do not tryto remove the cover with yourbare hands.

Store the wheel cover securelyin the rear of the vehicle untilyou have the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

If the vehicle has aluminumwheels, remove the wheel nutcaps using the wheel wrench.

3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but donot remove them — using thewrench. For wheels with a wheellock key, use the wheel lock keybetween the lock nut andwrench. The key is supplied inthe front passenger door pocket.

{ Caution

If this vehicle has wheel locks andan impact wrench is used toremove the wheel nuts, the locknut or wheel lock key could bedamaged. Do not use an impactwrench to remove the wheel nutsif this vehicle has wheel locks.


10-62 Vehicle Care

4. To identify the appropriatejacking location, find the triangleor rectangular notch about30.5 cm (12 in) from the front tireor about 27 cm (10.5 in) from therear tire.

Triangle Shown, Without Similar

The triangle may be locatednear each wheel on the vehicle'sexterior.

{ Caution

If a jack is used to raise thevehicle without positioning itcorrectly, the vehicle could bedamaged. When raising thevehicle on a jack, avoid contactwith the rear axle control arms.

5. Attach the wrench to the jack,and turn the wrench clockwise toraise the jack head 7.6 cm (3 in).

6. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Putthe compact spare tire near you.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning thewrench clockwise in the jack.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so that there isenough room for the spare tire tofit under the wheel well.

8. Remove all the wheel nuts andthe flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-63

9. Remove the plastic spare tireheat shield by pulling the rubberlatch. Store the plastic spare tireheat shield. See “Storing theSpare Tire” later in this sectionfor more information.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. When

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

changing a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Place the spare tire on thewheel mounting surface.

12. Put the nuts on by hand byturning them clockwise until thewheel is held against the

mounting surface. Make surethe rounded end is toward thewheel.

13. Lower the vehicle by attachingthe wrench to the jack andturning the wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.


10-64 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications forthe wheel nut torque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

{ Caution

Wheel covers will not fit on thevehicle's compact spare. If you tryto put a wheel cover on thecompact spare, the cover or thespare could be damaged.

Storing the Spare Tire

{ Warning

The underbody-mounted sparetire needs to be stored with thevalve stem pointing down. If thespare tire is stored with the valvestem pointing upwards, thesecondary latch will not workproperly and the spare tire couldloosen and suddenly fall from thevehicle. If this happened when

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the vehicle was being driven, thetire might contact a person oranother vehicle, causing injuryand damage to itself. Be sure theunderbody-mounted spare tire isstored with the valve stempointing down.

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.


Vehicle Care 10-65

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the compact spare tire nearthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem down.

2. Reinstall the plastic spare tireheat shield on the compactspare tire.

3. Slide the cable retainer throughthe center of the wheel and startto raise the compact spare tire.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

4. When the compact spare tire isalmost in the stored position,turn the tire so the valve istoward the rear of the vehicle.

This position helps whenchecking the air pressure in thecompact spare tire.

5. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle.Continue turning the wrench untilyou feel more than two clicks.This indicates that the compact

spare tire is secure and thecable is tight. The spare tirehoist cannot be overtightened.

6. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and then tryto turn the tire. If the tire moves,use the wrench to tighten thecable.

Storing the Flat Tire

1. Cable

2. Liftgate Hinges

3. Spare Tire Heat Shield

4. Center of the Wheel

5. Door Striker

1. Remove the cable package fromthe jack storage area.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.


10-66 Vehicle Care

3. Put the flat tire in the rearstorage area with the valve stempointing toward the rear of thevehicle.

4. Pull the cable (1) through thedoor striker (5), the center of thewheel (4), and the plastic sparetire heat shield (3), as shown.

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (2).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge on the other side ofthe vehicle.

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.

8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Push thetube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.

Storing the Tools

1. Tool Bag

2. Wing Bolt

3. Jack

Put back all tools as they werestored in the jack storagecompartment and put thecompartment cover back on.

1. Ensure that the bottom of thejack is facing toward you.

2. Replace the tool bag (1).


Vehicle Care 10-67

3. Turn the jack (3) on its side andplace down on the holdingbracket.

4. Reinstall the wing bolt (2) byturning clockwise.

5. To replace the cover, line up thetab at the front of the cover withthe notch in the cover opening.Push the cover in place andmake sure that the rear clips arein the slots and push the coverclosed.

Store the center cap or the plasticbolt-on wheel covers until a full sizetire is put back on the vehicle. Whenyou replace the compact spare witha full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-onwheel covers or the center cap.Hand-tighten them over the wheelnuts, using the wrench.

Compact Spare Tire

{ Warning

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.

The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

When using a compact spare tire,the ABS and Traction Controlsystems may engage until the sparetire is recognized by the vehicle,especially on slippery roads. Adjustdriving to reduce possiblewheel slip.

Performance of the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system will beautomatically reduced to protect thesystem when using the compactspare. To restore the AWD andprevent excessive wear on theclutch in the AWD, replace thecompact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as possible.


10-68 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

When the compact spare isinstalled, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheel,and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

{ Caution

Tire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damagethe vehicle and the chains. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-22.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

{ Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

{ Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.


Vehicle Care 10-69

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.If one of the vehicles is afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethe transfer case is not inNeutral.

{ Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on the othervehicle. Your vehicle has a

remote positive (+) and a remotenegative (−) jump startingterminal. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the terminallocations.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the batteries haveenough water. You do not need toadd water to the ACDelco®

battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

(Continued)


10-70 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery.

Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.


Vehicle Care 10-71

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the remotenegative (−) terminal of the deadbattery.

Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal for thispurpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Towing the Vehicle

{ Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lashor hook to the chassiscomponents — including the frontand rear subframes, suspensioncontrol arms, and links — duringtowing and recovery of a disabledvehicle, or when securing thevehicle. Use the proper nylonstrap harnesses around the tiresto secure the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.If a wheel lift tow truck is used, thedrive wheels cannot contact theroad while the vehicle is beingtowed. A wheel dolly must be usedto lift all drive wheels off the ground.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. The towing capacity of the

towing vehicle. Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far the vehicle will betowed. Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can be towed.

. The proper towing equipment.See your dealer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipmentrecommendations.

. If the vehicle is ready to betowed. Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Dinghy Towing

If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles may also be towedby putting the front wheels on adolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in thissection.

If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles can also be towedby placing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. These vehicles cannot betowed using a dolly.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components. Reinstallthe fuse to start the vehicle.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to be towed,shift the transmission toP (Park), and turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF.

2. Secure the vehicle to the towingvehicle.


4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

5. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

6. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove the 15 ampECM fuse and the 15 ampOnstar fuse. These are in thebattery compartment behind thepassenger seat on the floor.Also, remove the 50 amp BATT1fuse from the underhood fuseblock and store all fuses in asafe location. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10-28.

7. Release the parking brake.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is towed withoutperforming each of the stepslisted under “Dinghy Towing,” theautomatic transmission could bedamaged. Be sure to follow allsteps of the dinghy towingprocedure prior to and aftertowing the vehicle.


10-74 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceededwhile towing the vehicle, it couldbe damaged. Never exceed105 km/h (65 mph) while towingthe vehicle.

Once the destination is reached:


2. Reinstall the fuses.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park), turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF and remove the keyfrom the ignition.

4. Disconnect the vehicle from thetowing vehicle.

{ Caution

Do not tow a vehicle with the frontdrive wheels on the ground if oneof the front tires is a compactspare tire. Towing with two

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

different tire sizes on the front ofthe vehicle can cause severedamage to the transmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles must not betowed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed on

a platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-DriveVehicles Only)

To tow a front-wheel-drive vehiclefrom the front with two wheels onthe ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).



Vehicle Care 10-75

4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

{ Caution

Towing the vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never have thevehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaning

(Continued)


10-76 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

{ Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thee symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be power

washed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such as

calcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

{ Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-77

Caution (Continued)

may damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

{ Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum. To preventdamage always follow thesecleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to

the touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use a cleaning solutionapproved for aluminum. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use chrome cleaners.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses andemblems. Follow instructions under"Washing the Vehicle" previously inthis section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating.

Use only lukewarm water, a softcloth, and mild car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses. Donot clean or wipe them while theyare dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.. Washer fluids and other cleaning

agents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.


10-78 Vehicle Care

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

{ Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or

squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

{ Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

{ Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

{ Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose ormissing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually

check constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thefuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, Spring andFall, use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion


10-80 Vehicle Care

material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners to

remain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.


Vehicle Care 10-81

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

{ Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.


10-82 Vehicle Care

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholstery

cleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.


Vehicle Care 10-83

{ Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, spot lifters, or spotremovers. Do not use cleanersthat contain silicone or wax-basedproducts. Cleaners containingthese solvents can permanentlychange the appearance and feelof leather or soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

{ Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Button Retainer

Some vehicles have floor mats witha button-type retainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat tounlock and remove.

2. Reinstall the floor mat by liningup the floor mat openings overthe carpet retainers andsnapping into position.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.

Knob Retainer

Some vehicles have floor mats witha knob retainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Turn the knob until it is alignedwith the slot in the floor matgrommet.

2. Pull up on the floor mat.

3. Center the slot in the floor matgrommet with the knob on thefloor and set into position.


Vehicle Care 10-85

4. Turn the knob until it isperpendicular to the slot in thegrommet to lock the mat inplace.

5. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


10-86 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

{ Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9-42.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-3.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-7.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-50.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-19.



Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-50.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-7 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-9.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-12.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-19.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10-75. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-24.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-50.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-10.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10-75.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-21.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.



. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-75.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-23.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-23.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10-23.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-24.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2-20.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped withAWD. (4) @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7) @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped withAWD. (4) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7) @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Careon page 10-75.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.



Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspect

the shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-80 and Exterior Care onpage 10-75.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.



Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-7.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10-12.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Carrier Assembly – Differential (RearDrive Module) and Transfer Case

(Power Transfer Unit)

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, inCanada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C

Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 20958479 CF179C

Spark Plugs 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Front Driver – 63.0 cm (24.8 in) 20945799 —

Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 20945800 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 22814081 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 for more information.

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 11.3 L 11.9 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.0 L 1.0 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofilling out a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-800-462-8583 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance

Center. Any TTY user cancommunicate with GMC by dialing:1-800-462-8583. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with GMC and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.



GMC Owner Centre (Canada)gmcowner.ca

Take a trip to the GMC OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find the GMC-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the5 years/(160 000 km) 100,000 miPowertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.



. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,

the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultant

of your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),



extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by original

receipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resale

value, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history of

these parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repair



center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-28.



Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the



OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology in

GM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PressQ or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Press the OnStar Emergency button> to get a priority connection to anEmergency Advisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get assistance in severe

weather or other crisis andevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Press> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if equipped. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if equippedwith automatic door locks, and canhelp police locate the vehicle if it isstolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. For coveragemaps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.

After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

If directions are downloaded to thenavigation system, the route canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled through the OnStarRemoteLink® mobile app. Forcoverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).


14-4 OnStar

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, and BlackBerry® devicesto check vehicle fuel level, oil life,or tire pressure; to start the vehicle(if equipped) or unlock it; or toconnect to an OnStar Advisor. ForOnStar RemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Hands-Free Calling

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”


OnStar 14-5

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If anOn-Demand Diagnostics check isneeded between e-mails, pressQ,and an Advisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. Call 888-4-ONSTAR

(888-466-7827).. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features


14-6 OnStar

to function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the

vehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTY

system can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca(Canada)

The website provides access toaccount information, allowsmanagement of the OnStarsubscription, and viewing of videosof each service. Get subscriptionplan pricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click on the“My Account” tab on the homepage. The website navigation andservices provided may vary bycountry.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. To


OnStar 14-7

change the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five days.After five days, OnStar can contact

Roadside Assistance and alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbal

route or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-8 OnStar

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-53. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada).Privacy-sensitive users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this document


OnStar 14-9

should be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shall

Info-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that is

permitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Suchaltered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of the


14-10 OnStar

Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-10Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-25AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-15Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

AlertSide Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-35

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-25, 10-23AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Audio Controller,Rear (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-24Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-18

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-26

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2CameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-15CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-23

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-44

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51, 3-53Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 8-10

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9


INDEX i-3

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-67CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-25, 10-23

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9


i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont'd)Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Cooling System Messages . . .5-34Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-21Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-10Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32


INDEX i-5

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-43Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Requirements, California . . . . .9-43System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-49Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-28


i-6 INDEX

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-17Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-36Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-39LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-16Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

LightingDelayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-18Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-21

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-21Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont'd)Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-20Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-13Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-16Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-34Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Object Detection System . . . . .5-36Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-38Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Messages (cont'd)Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-17Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11


i-8 INDEX

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-36Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

PParade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-20Parking AssistUltrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-30Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-2

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18


INDEX i-9

Power (cont'd)Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear AudioController (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 8-10

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemRear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-18

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-37Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-36Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-22

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50


i-10 INDEX

Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-22Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-21

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4

Seats (cont'd)Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-53

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11StabiliTrakIndicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-23Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16


INDEX i-11

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Management System . . . 4-3Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1, 13-15Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-47Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-46Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Tires (cont'd)Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-46Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-46Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-72Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7


i-12 INDEX

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-34Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-49Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-41Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Vehicle (cont'd)Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-20Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-40

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-42Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-24WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Wiring, High VoltageDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

2014 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M...GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual...

Documents

Transcript of 2014 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M...GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual...